Download Delta Electronics AC Motor Drive VFD-E User's Manual
Transcript
Preface Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-E Series. The VFD-E Series is manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor technology available. This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference. To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before using VFD-E series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions, please contact your dealer. PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY. DANGER! 1. 2. AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made. A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. 3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring. 4. The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply. 5. Ground the VFD-E using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram. 6. VFD-E series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1phase motors or other purpose. 7. VFD-E series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation. WARNING! 1. DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive easily damage by high-voltage. 2. There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands. 3. Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. CAUTION! 1. 2. Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight, high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic particles. 3. Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or electric shock. 4. To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the equipment. 5. When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details. 6. The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the short circuit must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models). DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. Lonwork is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation. Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus International. CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation (CiA). Other trademarks belong to their respective owners. Table of Contents Preface ............................................................................................................. i Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-2 1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-3 1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances ................................................. 1-3 1.1.5 Remove Instructions ................................................................... 1-6 1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring ............................................... 1-8 1.2.1 Ambient Conditions..................................................................... 1-8 1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel............................................................................................... 1-11 1.3 Dimensions....................................................................................... 1-12 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring .............................................................. 2-1 2.1 Wiring ................................................................................................. 2-2 2.2 External Wiring ................................................................................. 2-12 2.3 Main Circuit ...................................................................................... 2-13 2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection............................................................ 2-13 2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals .............................................................. 2-16 2.4 Control Terminals ............................................................................. 2-17 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up ..................................................................3-1 3.1 Keypad ...............................................................................................3-1 3.2 Operation Method ...............................................................................3-2 3.3 Trial Run .............................................................................................3-3 Chapter 4 Parameters..................................................................................4-1 4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings.........................................................4-2 4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications..................................................4-32 4.3 Description of Parameter Settings ....................................................4-37 4.4 Different Parameters for VFD*E*C Models .....................................4-152 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting .........................................................................5-1 5.1 Over Current (OC) ..............................................................................5-1 5.2 Ground Fault.......................................................................................5-2 5.3 Over Voltage (OV) ..............................................................................5-2 5.4 Low Voltage (Lv).................................................................................5-3 5.5 Over Heat (OH)...................................................................................5-4 5.6 Overload .............................................................................................5-4 5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal ...............................................................5-5 5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)...............................................................................5-5 5.9 Motor cannot Run ...............................................................................5-6 5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed .....................................................5-7 5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration .......................................................5-8 5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected ..............................................5-8 5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise ......................................................5-9 5.14 Environmental Condition...................................................................5-9 5.15 Affecting Other Machines................................................................5-10 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance................................ 6-1 6.1 Fault Code Information ....................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions............................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Reset .......................................................................................... 6-6 6.2 Maintenance and Inspections............................................................. 6-6 Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1 Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1 B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives..............B-1 B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................ B-4 B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart ............................................................B-8 B.3 Fuse Specification Chart ....................................................................B-9 B.4 AC Reactor ......................................................................................B-10 B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value................................... B-10 B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value................................ B-11 B.4.3 Applications .............................................................................. B-12 B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ..................................................B-14 B.6 Remote Controller RC-01.................................................................B-15 B.7 PU06 ................................................................................................B-16 B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06 ........................... B-16 B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message............................................... B-16 B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart ............................................................... B-17 B.8 KPE-LE02 ........................................................................................B-18 B.8.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE-LE02 ............................ B-18 B.8.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad .......................................... B-20 B.8.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad ...............................................................................................B-21 B.9 Extension Card................................................................................ B-22 B.9.1 Relay Card................................................................................B-22 B.9.2 Digital I/O Card .........................................................................B-23 B.9.3 Analog I/O Card ........................................................................B-23 B.9.4 Communication Card ................................................................B-23 B.9.5 Speed Feedback Card ..............................................................B-24 B.10 Fieldbus Modules .......................................................................... B-24 B.10.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01) ...................B-24 B.10.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions ................................B-24 B.10.1.2 Wiring and Settings .........................................................B-25 B.10.1.3 Mounting Method ............................................................B-25 B.10.1.4 Power Supply ..................................................................B-26 B.10.1.5 LEDs Display...................................................................B-26 B.10.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01) ...................B-26 B.10.2.1 Introduction .....................................................................B-27 B.10.2.2 Dimensions .....................................................................B-27 B.10.2.3 Specifications ..................................................................B-27 B.10.2.4 Wiring ..............................................................................B-28 B.10.2.5 LED Indications ...............................................................B-28 B.10.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01).......................B-28 B.10.3.1 Panel Appearance...........................................................B-29 B.10.3.2 Dimensions .....................................................................B-30 B.10.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-E ........................................B-30 B.10.3.4 Power Supply.................................................................. B-30 B.10.3.5 PROFIBUS Address ....................................................... B-30 B.10.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)........................................................ B-31 B.10.4.1 Product Profile ................................................................ B-31 B.10.4.2 Specifications.................................................................. B-31 B.10.4.3 Components ................................................................... B-32 B.10.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting ................ B-33 B.11 DIN Rail..........................................................................................B-35 B.11.1 MKE-DRA ............................................................................... B-35 B.11.2 MKE-DRB ............................................................................... B-36 B.11.3 MKE-EP.................................................................................. B-36 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive.............................. C-1 C.1 Capacity Formulas .............................................................................C-2 C.2 General Precaution ............................................................................C-4 C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor .......................................................C-5 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function..................................................... D-1 D.1 PLC Overview....................................................................................D-1 D.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................D-1 D.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft .............................................D-1 D.2 Start-up ..............................................................................................D-2 D.2.1 The Steps for PLC Execution .....................................................D-2 D.2.2 Device Reference Table.............................................................D-3 D.2.3 WPLSoft Installation ...................................................................D-4 D.2.4 Program Input.............................................................................D-5 D.2.5 Program Download .................................................................... D-5 D.2.6 Program Monitor ........................................................................ D-6 D.2.7 The Limit of PLC ........................................................................ D-6 D.3 Ladder Diagram ................................................................................ D-8 D.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram...................... D-8 D.3.2 Introduction ................................................................................ D-8 D.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram ........................................ D-11 D.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program ............................. D-14 D.4 PLC Devices ................................................................................... D-19 D.4.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number ................................... D-19 D.4.2 Devices Functions ................................................................... D-20 D.4.3 Value, Constant [K] / [H] .......................................................... D-21 D.4.4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay ............................................... D-22 D.4.5 The Function of Timer.............................................................. D-22 D.4.6 The Features and Functions of Counter .................................. D-23 D.4.7 Register Types......................................................................... D-24 D.4.8 Special Auxiliary Relays .......................................................... D-25 D.4.9 Special Registers..................................................................... D-26 D.4.10 Communication Addresses for Devices (only for PLC2 mode) .. D27 D.4.11 Function Code (only for PLC2 mode) .................................... D-28 D.5 Commands...................................................................................... D-28 D.5.1 Basic Commands..................................................................... D-28 D.5.2 Output Commands................................................................... D-29 D.5.3 Timer and Counters ................................................................. D-29 D.5.4 Main Control Commands..........................................................D-29 D.5.5 Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact ......D-29 D.5.6 Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands............................D-30 D.5.7 End Command .........................................................................D-30 D.5.8 Explanation for the Commands ................................................D-30 D.5.9 Description of the Application Commands................................D-45 D.5.10 Explanation for the Application Commands............................D-46 D.5.11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive .........D-58 D.6 Error Code .......................................................................................D-65 Appendix E CANopen Function .................................................................E-1 E.1 Overview ............................................................................................E-2 E.1.1 CANopen Protocol...................................................................... E-2 E.1.2 RJ-45 Pin Definition.................................................................... E-3 E.1.3 Pre-Defined Connection Set ....................................................... E-3 E.1.4 CANopen Communication Protocol ............................................ E-4 E.1.4.1 NMT (Network Management Object) .................................. E-4 E.1.4.2 SDO (Service Data Object)................................................. E-6 E.1.4.3 PDO (Process Data Object)................................................ E-7 E.1.4.4 EMCY (Emergency Object).................................................E-9 E.2 How to Control by CANopen ............................................................E-13 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 1 Introduction The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are: CAUTION! 1. Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes. 2. Store within an ambient temperature range of -20 °C to +60 °C. 3. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. 4. Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA. 5. DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package. 6. DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and frost. 7. If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors. 8. When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-1 Chapter 1 Introduction| 1.1 Receiving and Inspection This VFD-E AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following: Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick Start and CD. Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of your order. 1.1.1 Nameplate Information Example for 1HP/0.75kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive AC Drive Model Input Spec. Output Spec. Output Frequency Range Serial Number & Bar Code Software Version Power Board Control Board MODEL : VFD007E23A INPUT :3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 5.1A OUTPUT :3PH 0-240V 4.2A 1.6kVA 0.75kW/1HP FREQUENCY RANGE : 0.1~400Hz 007E23A0T5011230 01.03 02.03 1.1.2 Model Explanation VFD 007 E 23 A A: Standard drive C: CANopen P: Cold plate drive (frame A only) Version Type T: Frame A, built-in brake chopper Mains Input Voltage 11:115 V Single phase 21: 230V Single phase 23:230 V Three phase 43:460 V Three phase E Series Applicable motor capacity 002: 0.25 HP(0.2kW) 037: 5 HP(3.7kW) 004: 0.5 HP(0.4kW) 055: 7.5 HP(5.5kW) 015: 2 HP(1.5kW) 110: 15 HP(11kW) 022: 3 HP(2.2kW) Series Name ( V ariable F requency D rive) 1-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 1 Introduction| 1.1.3 Series Number Explanation 007E23A 7T 7 01 230V 3-phase 1HP(0.75kW) Production number Production week Production year 2007 Production factory T: Taoyuan, W: Wujiang Model If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are any problems, please contact your distributor. 1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances 0.25-2HP/0.2-1.5kW (Frame A) Input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Case body Keypad cover Control board case Control board cover Output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-3 Chapter 1 Introduction| 1-15HP/0.75-11kW (Frame B&C) Input terminals cover (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Keypad cover Case body Control board cover Output terminals cover (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) Internal Structure READY: power indicator RUN: status indicator FAULT: fault indicator 1. Switch to ON for 50Hz, refer to P 01.00 to P01.02 for details 2. Switch to ON for free run to stop refer to P02.02 3. Switch to ON for setting frequency source to ACI (P 02.00=2) ACI terminal (ACI/AVI2 switch ) NPN/PNP Mounting port for extension card RS485 port (RJ-45) NOTE The LED “READY” will light up after applying power. The light won’t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off. 1-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 1 Introduction| RFI Jumper Location Frame A: near the output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) Frame B: above the nameplate Frame C: above the warning label Frame Power range A 0.25-2hp (0.2-1.5kW) Models VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-5 Chapter 1 Introduction| Frame Power range Models VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, B 1-5hp (0.75-3.7kW) VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C C 7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW) VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C RFI Jumper RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line. Main power isolated from earth: If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage (according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current. CAUTION! 1. After applying power to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper. Therefore, please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper. 2. The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides, electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper. 3. Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth. 4. The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high. 5. To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system or a corner grounded TN system. 1.1.5 Remove Instructions 1-6 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 1 Introduction| Remove Keypad 1. Remove Front Cover Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover. 2. Pull the cover up to release. Step 1 Step 2 Remove RST Terminal Cover Remove UVW Terminal Cover (For Frame B and Frame C) (For Frame B and Frame C) For frame A, it doesn’t have cover and can be For frame A, it doesn’t have cover and can be wired directly. wired directly. Remove Fan Remove Extension Card Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-7 Chapter 1 Introduction| 1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring 1.2.1 Ambient Conditions Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions: -10 ~ +50°C (14 ~ 122°F) for UL & cUL Air Temperature: -10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 104°F) for side-by-side mounting Relative Humidity: Operation <90%, no condensation allowed Atmosphere pressure: Installation Site Altitude: 86 ~ 106 kPa <1000m Vibration: <20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max 20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max Temperature: -20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F) Relative Humidity: Storage Transportation Atmosphere pressure: <90%, no condensation allowed 86 ~ 106 kPa <20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max 20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max Vibration: Pollution Degree 2: good for a factory type environment. Minimum Mounting Clearances Frame A Mounting Clearances Option 1 (-10 to +50°C) Option 2 (-10 to +40°C) 120mm 120mm 50mm Air Flow 50mm 50mm 50mm 120mm 1-8 Air flow 120mm Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 1 Introduction| Frame B and C Mounting Clearances Option 1 (-10 to +50°C) Option 2 (-10 to +40°C) 150mm 150mm Air flow 50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm Air Flow 150mm 150mm For VFD-E-P series: heat sink system example Air-extracting apparatus Control panel Duct temperature 40 C Air flow speed 2m/sec dust collector User 's heat sink should comply with following conditions: 1. Flatness <0.1mm 2. Roughness <6um 3. Grease 10um~12um 4. Screw torque: 16Kgf-cm 5. Recommended temperature <80 C AC motor drive fan CAUTION! 1. Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause damage to the AC motor drive. 2. 3. Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty! Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions are not allowed. 4. The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-9 Chapter 1 Introduction| 5. The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature. 6. When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a space with bad ventilation. 7. Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the heatsink. 8. When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating. Installation with Metal Separation 120mm 150mm Installation without Metal Separation 120mm 150mm B A 120mm 150mm 120mm 150mm 120mm Frame A Air flow 150mm A B 120mm 150mm Frame B and C Frame A 1-10 Frame B and C Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 1 Introduction| 1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives in Parallel 1. 2. This function is not for VFD-E-T series. The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when deceleration. 3. Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus. 4. The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel. 5. Only the same power system can be connected in parallel. 6. It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel (no limit in horsepower). power s hould be applied at the same time (only the same power sy stem can be connected in parallel) Power 115/208/220/230/380/440/480 (depend on models) U V W U V W U V W U V W IM IM IM IM Br ak e module F or frame A, ter minal + (- ) is c onnec ted to the terminal + ( -) of the brak e module. F or frame B and C, ter minal + /B1 (- ) is c onnec ted to the terminal + ( -) of the brak e module. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-11 Chapter 1 Introduction| 1.3 Dimensions (Dimensions are in millimeter and [inch]) W W1 D H D H1 Frame W W1 H H1 D Ø ØD A 72.0[2.83] 60.0[2.36] 142.0[5.59] 120.0[4.72] 152.0[5.98] 5.2[0.04] 7.6[0.06] B 100.0[3.94] 89.0[3.50] 174.0[6.86] 162.0[6.38] 152.0[5.98] 5.5[0.22] 9.3[0.36] C 130.0[5.12] 116.0[4.57] 260.0[10.24] 246.5[9.70] 169.2[6.66] 5.5[0.22] 9.8[0.38] NOTE Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C 1-12 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 1 Introduction| Dimensions for VFD-E-P series W W1 D D1 H2 H1 H W2 Unit: mm [inch] W W1 W2 H H1 H2 D D1 Ø 72.0 56.0 30.0 155.0 143.0 130.0 111.5 9.5 5.3 [2.83] [2.20] [1.18] [6.10] [5.63] [5.12] [4.39] [0.37] [0.21] NOTE Frame A: VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P/43P Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1-13 Chapter 1 Introduction| This page intentionally left blank 1-14 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring After removing the front cover, check if the power and control terminals are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring. General Wiring Information Applicable Codes All VFD-E series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and the motor nameplate for electrical data. The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for each VFD-E Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required. CAUTION! 1. Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate. 2. All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or electric shock. 3. Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration. 4. Check following items after finishing the wiring: A. Are all connections correct? B. No loose wires? C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground? Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-1 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| DANGER! 1. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC motor drive. 2. Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring and commissioning. 3. Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock. 2.1 Wiring Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS-485 communication. 2-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 1 for models of VFD-E Series VFD002E11A/21A, VFD004E11A/21A, VFD007E21A, VFD002E11C/21C, VFD004E11C/21C, VFD007E21C, VFD002E11P/21P, VFD004E11P/21P, VFD007E21P BR BUE brake resi stor (opti onal) brake unit ( optional) F us e/NF B(None F use Br eaker) + R(L1) S(L2) R(L1) S(L2) E SA Recommended Circui t when power s uppl y is turned O FF by a fault output MC OF F ON RB RC MC +24V F WD/Stop F act ory set tin g: NPN Mo de NPN Sw1 REV/Stop F ac tor y setting PNP Please refer to F ig ur e 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e an d PNP m od e. Multi-s tep 1 Multi-s tep 2 Multi-s tep 3 Multi-s tep 4 Digital Si gnal Common MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 U(T1) V(T2) W(T 3) IM 3~ E RA RB RC MO1 MCM AFM DCM E Motor ACM E Multi-function c ontact output Refer to c hapter 2.4 for details . F ac tor y setting is malfunction indication F ac tor y setting: Driv e is in oper ation 48V50mA Max. Multi-function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi- func tion Output Ter minal factory setti ng: Analog fr eq. / c ur rent meter 0~1 0VDC/2 mA Analog S ignal common F ac tor y setting: output frequency +10V 3 F act ory set tin g: ACI Mod e 5K AVI 2 1 Sw2 RS-485 serial inter face (NO T for VF D*E*C models) Power supply +10V 20m A AVI Master Fr equency 0 to 10V 47K ACI ACI ACI/AVI sw itch Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2 4-20mA/0-10V ACM Analog S ignal Common Main c irc ui t (power) terminals Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 8 E Contr ol c ircuit ter minals 1: Reserv ed 2: EV 3: G ND 4: SG 5: SG + 6: Reserv ed 1 7: Reserv ed 8: Reserv ed F or VFD*E*C m o dels, p lease ref er t o figu re 8. Shielded l eads & Cable 2-3 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 2 for models of VFD-E Series VFD002E23A, VFD004E23A/43A, VFD007E23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E23C, VFD004E23C/43C, VFD007E23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E23P, VFD004E23P/43P, VFD007E23P/43P, VFD015E23P BR BUE brake resi stor (opti onal) brake unit ( optional) F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker) + R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) E R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) SA Recommended Circui t when power s uppl y is turned O FF by a fault output MC OF F ON RB NPN MC Sw1 REV/Stop F ac tor y setting PNP Multi-s tep 1 Multi-s tep 2 Multi-s tep 3 Please refer to F ig ur e 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e an d PNP m od e. Multi-s tep 4 Digital Si gnal Common W(T3) RC MO1 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MCM AFM DCM E Motor IM 3~ E RB +24V F act ory set tin g: NPN Mo de V(T2) RA RC F WD /Stop U(T 1) ACM E Multi-function c ontact output Refer to c hapter 2.4 for details . F ac tor y setting is malfunction indication F ac tor y setting: Driv e is in oper ation 48V50mA Max. Multi-function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi- func tion Output Ter minal factory setti ng: Analog fr eq. / c ur rent meter 0~1 0VDC/2 mA Analog S ignal common F ac tor y setting: output frequency +10V 3 F act ory set tin g: ACI Mod e 5K AVI 2 1 Sw2 AVI Master Fr equency 0 to 10V 47K ACI ACI ACI/AVI sw itch Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2 4-20mA/0-10V ACM Analog S ignal Common Main c irc ui t (power) terminals 2-4 RS-485 serial inter face (NO T for VF D*E*C models) Power supply +10V 20m A 8 1 E Contr ol c ircuit ter minals 1: Reserv ed 2: EV 3: G ND 4: SG 5: SG + 6: Reserv ed 7: Reserv ed 8: Reserv ed F or VFD*E*C m o dels, p lease ref er t o figu re 8. Shielded l eads & Cable Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 3 for models of VFD-E Series VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C brake resi stor (opti onal) BR F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker) +/B1 R(L1) S(L2) R(L1) S(L2) B2 Recommended Circuit when power s uppl y is turned O FF by a fault output MC OF F ON RA RB MC +24V F act ory set ting : NPN Mo de NPN Sw1 REV/Stop F ac tor y setting PNP Multi-s tep 1 Multi-s tep 2 Multi-s tep 3 Please refer to F ig ure 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e and PNP m od e. Multi-s tep 4 Digital Si gnal Common MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 RC MO1 MCM AFM DCM E ACM E 3 5K AVI 2 1 Sw2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Multi-function Photocoulper O utput Analog Multi- func tion Output Termi nal factory setti ng: Analog freq./ cur rent meter 0~ 10VDC/ 2mA Analog S ignal common AVI 1: Reserv ed 2: EV 3: G ND 4: SG 5: SG + 6: Reserv ed 7: Reserv ed 8: Reserv ed F or VFD*E*C m o dels, p lease ref er to f igu re 8. Master Fr equency 0 to 10V 47K ACM Main c ircui t (power) terminals F ac tor y s etting: Driv e is in operation 48V50mA Max. RS-485 s erial inter fac e (NO T for VF D*E*C models) 4-20mA/0-10V Analog S ignal Common Multi-function c ontact output Refer to c hapter2.4 for detai ls. F ac tor y s etting is malfunction indication Power supply +10V 20mA ACI ACI ACI/AVI sw it ch Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2 IM 3~ F ac tor y s etting: output frequency +10V F act ory set ting : ACI Mod e Motor E RB RC F WD/Stop V(T2) W(T 3) E SA U(T 1) 8 1 E Contr ol c ircuit ter minals Shielded l eads & Cable 2-5 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 4 for models of VFD-E Series VFD022E23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD022E23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C brake resi stor (opti onal) BR F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker) +/B1 R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) E R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) SA Recommended Circ ui t when power suppl y is turned O FF by a fault output MC OF F ON B2 RB NPN MC Sw1 REV/Stop F ac tor y setting PNP Multi-s tep 1 Multi-s tep 2 Multi-s tep 3 Please refer to F ig u re 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e an d PNP m od e. Multi-s tep 4 Digital Si gnal Common W(T 3) RC MO1 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MCM AFM DCM E ACM E 3 5K AVI 2 1 Sw2 Master Fr equency 0 to 10V 47K ACM Main c irc ui t (power) terminals 2-6 AVI 4-20mA/0-10V Analog S ignal Common E Multi-function c ontact output Refer to c hapter2.4 for details. F ac tor y setting is malfunction indication F ac tor y setting: Driv e is in oper ation 48V50mA Max. Multi-function Photocoulper Output Analog Multi- func ti on Output Ter minal factory setti ng: Analog freq./ cur rent meter 0~ 10VDC/ 2mA Analog S ignal common RS-485 serial inter face (NO T for VF D *E*C models) Pow er supply +10V 20m A ACI ACI ACI/AVI sw itch Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2 IM 3~ F ac tor y setting: output frequency +10V F act ory set tin g: ACI Mod e Motor E RB +24V F act ory set tin g: NPN Mo de V(T2) RA RC F WD/Stop U(T 1) 8 1: Reserv ed 2: EV 3: G ND 4: SG 5: SG + 6: Reserv ed 1 7: Reserv ed 8: Reserv ed F or VFD*E*C mo dels, p lease ref er t o figu re 8. Contr ol c ircuit ter minals Shielded l eads & Cable Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 5 for models of VFD-E Series VFD002E11T/21T, VFD004E11A/21T, VFD007E21T BR brake resi stor (opti onal) F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker) B1 R(L1) S(L2) R(L1) S(L2) Recommended Circuit when power s uppl y is turned O FF by a fault output MC OF F ON RA RB MC +24V F act ory set ting : NPN Mo de NPN Sw1 REV/Stop F ac tor y setting PNP Multi-s tep 1 Multi-s tep 2 Multi-s tep 3 Please refer to F ig ure 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e and PNP m od e. Multi-s tep 4 Digital Si gnal Common MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 RC MO1 MCM AFM DCM E ACM E 3 5K AVI 2 1 Sw2 Power supply +10V 20mA 4-20mA/0-10V ACM Analog S ignal Common Main c ircui t (power) terminals E F ac tor y s etting: Driv e is in operation 48V50mA Max. Multi-function Photocoulper O utput Analog Multi- func tion Output Termi nal factory setti ng: Analog freq./ cur rent meter 0~ 10V DC/ 2mA Analog S ignal common RS-485 AVI Master Fr equency 0 to 10V 47K ACI ACI ACI/AVI sw it ch Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2 Multi-function c ontact output Refer to c hapter2.4 for detai ls. F ac tor y s etting is malfunction indication F ac tor y s etting: output frequency +10V F act ory set ting : ACI Mod e IM 3~ V(T2) E RB RC F WD/Stop Motor W(T 3) E SA B2 U(T 1) 8 Seri al interface 1: Reserv ed 2: EV 3: G ND 4: SG 1 5: SG + 6: Reserv ed 7: Reserv ed 8: Reserv ed Contr ol c ircuit ter minals Shielded l eads & Cable NOTE F or VF D-E- T s eries, the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals ( B1 and B2) dir ectly. B ut it c an't connec t DC- BUS i n parallel. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-7 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 6 for models of VFD-E Series VFD002E23T, VFD004E23T/43T, VFD007E23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T BR brake resi stor (opti onal) F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker) B1 R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) E R(L1) S(L2) T( L3) SA Recommended Circuit when power s uppl y is turned O FF by a fault output MC OF F ON RB +24V F act ory set ting : NPN Mo de NPN Sw1 REV/Stop F ac tor y setting PNP Multi-s tep 1 Multi-s tep 2 Multi-s tep 3 Please refer to F ig ure 7 fo r w irin g of NPN m od e and PNP m od e. Multi-s tep 4 Digital Si gnal Common MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 E RC MO1 MCM AFM DCM E ACM E 5K AVI 2 1 Sw2 Power supply +10V 20mA 4-20mA/0-10V ACM Analog S ignal Common Main c ircui t (power) terminals E F ac tor y s etting: Driv e is in operation 48V50mA Max. Multi-function Photocoulper O utput Analog Multi- func tion Output Termi nal factory setti ng: Analog freq./ cur rent meter 0~ 10VDC/ 2mA Analog S ignal common RS-485 AVI Master Fr equency 0 to 10V 47K ACI ACI ACI/AVI sw it ch Wh en switch in g to AVI, it in dicates AVI2 Multi-function c ontact output Refer to c hapter2.4 for detai ls. F ac tor y s etting is malfunction indication F ac tor y s etting: output frequency +10V 3 F act ory set ting : ACI Mod e IM 3~ W(T 3) RB MC Motor V(T2) RA RC F WD/Stop B2 U(T1) 8 Seri al interface 1: Reserv ed 2: EV 3: G ND 4: SG 1 5: SG + 6: Reserv ed 7: Reserv ed 8: Reserv ed Contr ol c ircuit ter minals Shielded l eads & Cable NOTE F or VF D-E- T s eries, the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals ( B1 and B2) dir ectly. B ut it c an't connec t DC- BUS i n parallel. 2-8 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Figure 7 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode A. NPN mode without external power NPN PNP Factory setting B. NPN mode with external power NPN PNP 24 Vdc + - Factory setting C. PNP mode without external power NPN Sw1 PNP Factory setting Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-9 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| D. PNP mode with external power NPN Sw1 PNP Factory setting + 24 Vdc - Figure 8 RJ-45 pin definition for VFD*E*C models PIN Signal Description 1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high) 2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low) 3 CAN_GND 4 SG+ 485 communication 5 SG- 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V- Ground / 0V /V- CAUTION! 1. 2. The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions. Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the terminal. 3. Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube. 4. Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage. 5. The AC motor drive, motor and wiring may cause interference. To prevent the equipment damage, please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the equipment. 6. When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively. To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor leads. 2-10 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 7. With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for 5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor. 8. The AC motor drive, electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be grounded separately. 9. 10. Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible. No brake resistor is built in the VFD-E series, it can install brake resistor for those occasions that use higher load inertia or frequent start/stop. Refer to Appendix B for details. 11. Multiple VFD-E units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no ground loops. Excellent Good Not allowed Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2.2 External Wiring Items Power Supply FUSE/NFB Magnetic contactor Input AC Line Reactor Zero-phase Reactor T/L3 +/B1 B2 BR S/L2 BUE R/L1 Brake resistor Brake unit EMI Filter U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 Zero-phase Reactor Output AC Line Reactor Motor 2-12 Explanations Power supply Please follow the specific power supply requirements shown in Appendix A. Fuse/NFB (Optional) There may be an inrush current during power up. Please check the chart of Appendix B and select the correct fuse with rated current. Use of an NFB is optional. Magnetic contactor (Optional) Please do not use a Magnetic contactor as the I/O switch of the AC motor drive, as it will reduce the operating life cycle of the AC drive. Used to improve the input power factor, to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC Input AC Line Reactor line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA (Optional) or more or advanced capacity is activated .The wiring distance should be ≤ 10m. Refer to appendix B for details. Zero phase reactors are used to reduce radio noise especially when Zero-phase audio equipment is installed near the Reactor inverter. Effective for noise reduction (Ferrite Core on both the input and output sides. Common Attenuation quality is good for a wide Choke) range from AM band to 10MHz. (Optional) Appendix B specifies the zero phase reactor. (RF220X00A) EMI filter To reduce electromagnetic interference. Brake resistor and Brake unit (Optional) Used to reduce the deceleration time of the motor. Please refer to the chart in Appendix B for specific Brake resistors. Motor surge voltage amplitude Output AC depends on motor cable length. For Line Reactor applications with long motor cable (Optional) (>20m), it is necessary to install a reactor at the inverter output side Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2.3 Main Circuit 2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection Figure 1 For frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P Brake Resistor(Optional) BR No fuse breaker (NFB) R S T BUE MC R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) Brake Unit (Optional) - + U(T1) V(T2) W(T3) E Motor IM 3~ E Figure 2 For frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C For frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C B ra ke Re sisto r( Op tio na l) N o fuse br eaker ( NF B) R S T BR MC +/B1 R (L1 ) S(L2 ) T(L 3) U (T 1) B2 V(T2 ) W(T3 ) E Motor IM 3~ E Figure 3 For Frame A: VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T No fuse breaker (NFB) R S T BR MC B1 R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) E Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Brake Resistor (Optional) B2 U(T1) V(T2) W(T3) Motor IM 3~ E 2-13 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Terminal Symbol Explanation of Terminal Function R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase) U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor +/B1~ B2 +/B1, - Connections for Brake resistor (optional) Connections for External Brake unit (BUE series) Earth connection, please comply with local regulations. CAUTION! Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a no-fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence. It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber. Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration. Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A. When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above, and not less than 0.1-second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping. For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above. Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour. Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source. Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W) 2-14 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running. The methods to control the operation direction are: method 1, set by the communication parameters. Please refer to the group 9 for details. Method2, control by the optional keypad KPE-LE02. Refer to Appendix B for details. When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta. DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output terminals of AC motor drives. Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation. Terminals [+/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor BR BR +/B1 B2 or B1 B2 fo r m od e ls VFD xxExxT Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps, short deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque. If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (frame B, frame C and VFDxxxExxT models), connect the external brake resistor to the terminals [+/B1, B2]. Models of frame A don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external optional brake unit (BUE-series) and brake resistor. Refer to BUE series user manual for details. BR BUE Brake resistor/unit(optional) Please refer to Appendix B for details. + - Connect the terminals [+(P), -(N)] of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals [+/B1, ]. The length of wiring should be less than 5m with cable. When not used, please leave the terminals [+/B1, -] open. WARNING! Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+/B1] can damage the AC motor drive. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-15 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| 2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Frame Power Terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 A U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, Frame C Frame B Torque Wire Wire type 14kgf-cm 12-14 AWG. (3.3-2.1mm2) Copper only, 75oC 8-18 AWG. (8.4-0.8mm2) Copper only, 75oC 8-16 AWG. (8.4-1.3mm2) Copper only, 75oC (12in-lbf) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 B U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 18kgf-cm (15.6in-lbf) +/B1, B2, -, R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 C U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 30kgf-cm (26in-lbf) +/B1, B2, - 2-16 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| NOTE Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C For frame C: To connect 6 AWG (13.3 mm2) wires, use Recognized Ring Terminals 2.4 Control Terminals Circuit diagram for digital inputs (NPN current 16mA.) NPN Mode PNP Mode DCM +24 Multi-Input Terminal multi-input terminal DCM Internal Circuit Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 +24V Internal Circuit 2-17 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| The position of the control terminals RA RB RC AFM MCM MO1 RS-485 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V Terminal symbols and functions Terminal Symbol Factory Settings (NPN mode) Terminal Function ON: Connect to DCM ON: Run in MI1 direction OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method MI1 Forward-Stop command MI2 Reverse-Stop command MI3 Multi-function Input 3 MI4 Multi-function Input 4 Refer to Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for programming the Multi-function Inputs. MI5 Multi-function Input 5 ON: the activation current is 5.5mA. OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA. MI6 Multi-function Input 6 ON: Run in MI2 direction OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method +24V DC Voltage Source +24VDC, 20mA used for PNP mode. DCM Digital Signal Common Common for digital inputs and used for NPN mode. RA Multi-function Relay output (N.O.) a RB Multi-function Relay output (N.C.) b Resistive Load: 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC RC 2-18 Multi-function Relay common Inductive Load: 1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC 1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC Refer to Pr.03.00 for programming Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Terminal Symbol Factory Settings (NPN mode) Terminal Function ON: Connect to DCM Maximum 48VDC, 50mA Refer to Pr.03.01 for programming Max: 48Vdc 50mA MO1-DCM MO1 Mo1 Multi-function Output 1 (Photocoupler) MCM internal circuit MCM Multi-function output common Common for Multi-function Outputs +10V Potentiometer power supply +10VDC 3mA Analog voltage Input Impedance: +10V AVI AVI circuit 10 bits Range: 0 ~ 10VDC = 0 ~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) AVI ACM internal circuit ACM 47kΩ Resolution: Selection: Pr.02.00, Pr.02.09, Pr.10.00 Set-up: Pr.04.11 ~ Pr.04.14, 04.19~04.23 Analog control signal (common) Common for AVI, ACI, AFM Analog current Input Impedance: ACI ACI circuit 250Ω Resolution: 10 bits Range: 4 ~ 20mA = ACI 0 ~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) ACM internal circuit Selection: Pr.02.00, Pr.02.09, Pr.10.00 Set-up: Pr.04.15 ~ Pr.04.18 Analog output meter 0 to 10V, 2mA ACM circuit Impedance: AFM AFM 0~10V potentiometer Max. 2mA internal circuit ACM 100kΩ Output current 2mA max Resolution: 8 bits Range: 0 ~ 10VDC Function: Pr.03.03 to Pr.03.04 2 NOTE: Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm ) with shielded wire. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-19 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| Analog inputs (AVI, ACI, ACM) Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement. If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a capacitor (0.1 μ F and above) and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams: AVI/ACI C ACM ferrite core wind each wires 3 times or more around the core Digital inputs (MI1~MI6, DCM) When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality components to avoid contact bounce. Digital outputs (MO1, MCM) Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams. When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode across the coil and check the polarity. General Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle. The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live power wiring or terminals. DANGER! Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes in contact with high voltage. 2-20 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| The specification for the control terminals RA The position of the control terminals RB RC Terminals 1 AFM MCM MO1 Terminals 2 RS-485 port MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V Frame A, B, C Control Terminals Torque Wire Terminals 1 5 kgf-cm (4.4 in-lbf) 12-24 AWG (3.3-0.2mm2) Terminals 2 2 kgf-cm (1.7 in-lbf) 16-24 AWG (1.3-0.2mm2) NOTE Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 2-21 Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring| This page intentionally left blank 2-22 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3. are NOT connected to power and that the drive is well grounded. Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands. Please check if READY LED is ON when power is applied. Check if the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KPELE02. It should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to “Fault Code Information and Maintenance” for solution. Please do NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still applied to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off. 3.1 Keypad There are three LEDs on the keypad: LED READY: It will light up after applying power. The light won’t be off until the capacitors are discharged to safe voltage levels after power off. LED RUN: It will light up when the motor is running. LED FAULT: It will light up when fault occurs. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 3-1 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| 3.2 Operation Method The operation method can be set via communication, control terminals and optional keypad KPELE02. RS485 port (RJ-45) It needs to use VFD-USB01 or IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC. 3-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| Operation Method Operate from the communication Operation Command Source Frequency Source When setting communication by the PC, it needs to use VFD-USB01 or IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC. Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details. +24V FWD/Stop Factory setting: NPN Mode NPN Factory setting Sw1 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 REV/Stop PNP Multi-step 1 Multi-step 2 Multi-step 3 Multi-step 4 Digital Signal Common DCM E * Don't apply the mains voltage directly to above terminals. Operate from external signal Factory setting: ACI Mode AVI Sw2 3 5K 2 1 AVI Master Frequency 0 to 10V 47K ACI ACI ACI/AVI switch When switching to AVI, it indicates AVI2 +10V Power supply +10V 3mA 4-20mA/0-10V ACM Analog Signal Common E Figure 3-1 MI3-DCM (Set Pr.04.05=10) MI4-DCM (Set Pr.04.06=11) External terminals input: MI1-DCM MI2-DCM Operate from the optional keypad (KPE-LE02) 3.3 Trial Run The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal (Pr.02.01=2). 1. Both MI1-DCM and MI2-DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD/STOP and REV/STOP. 2. Please connect a potentiometer among AVI, 10V and DCM or apply power 0-10Vdc to AVI-DCM (as shown in figure 3-1) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 3-3 Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up| 3. Setting the potentiometer or AVI-DCM 0-10Vdc power to less than 1V. 4. Setting MI1=On for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse running, you should set MI2=On. And if you want to decelerate to stop, please set MI1/MI2=Off. 5. Check following items: Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct. Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration. Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth. If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad, please operate by the following steps. 1. Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive correctly. 2. After applying the power, verify that LED display shows F 0.0Hz. 3. Set Pr.02.00=0 and Pr.02.01=0. (Refer to Appendix B operation flow for detail) 4. Press around 5Hz. 5. Press key for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse key to set frequency to running, you should press in page. And if you want to decelerate to stop, please press key. 6. Check following items: Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct. Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration. Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth. If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run. 3-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters The VFD-E parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications, the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during operation. The 14 groups are as follows: Group 0: User Parameters Group 1: Basic Parameters Group 2: Operation Method Parameters Group 3: Output Function Parameters Group 4: Input Function Parameters Group 5: Multi-Step Speed Parameters Group 6: Protection Parameters Group 7: Motor Parameters Group 8: Special Parameters Group 9: Communication Parameters Group 10: PID Control Parameters Group 11: Multi-function Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-1 Chapter 4 Parameters| 4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings : The parameter can be set during operation. Group 0 User Parameters Settings Factory Customer Setting Parameter Explanation 00.00 Identity Code of the AC motor drive Read-only ## 00.01 Rated Current Display of the AC motor drive Read-only #.# 0: Parameter can be read/written 1: All parameters are read only 00.02 Parameter Reset 6: Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12) 0 10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V) 0: Display the frequency command value (Fxxx) 1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx) 00.03 Start-up Display Selection 2: Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 0 3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04 4: FWD/REV command 5: PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 00.04 Content of Multifunction Display 0: Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 0 1: Display the counter value (c) 2: Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u) 4: Display output voltage (E) 4-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 5: Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%) 6: Output power factor angle (n) 7: Display output power (P) 8: Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current (t) 9: Display AVI (I) (V) 10: Display ACI / AVI2 (i) (mA/V) 11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (°C) 12: Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.) 13: Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.) 14: Display PG speed in RPM (G) 15: Display motor number (M) 00.05 User-Defined Coefficient K 0. 1 to 160.0 1.0 00.06 Power Board Software Version Read-only #.## 00.07 Control Board Software Version Read-only #.## 00.08 Password Input 0 to 9999 0 00.09 Password Set 0 to 9999 0 00.10 Control Method 00.11 Reserved 00.12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection 0: V/f Control 0 1: Vector Control 0: 230V/400V 0 1: 220V/380V Group 1 Basic Parameters Parameter 01.00 Explanation Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax) Settings 50.00 to 600.0 Hz Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Factory Customer Setting 60.00 4-3 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings 01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 0) 01.02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0) 01.03 Mid-Point Frequency 0.10 to 600.0 Hz (Fmid) (Motor 0) 01.04 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0) 01.05 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0) 01.06 Factory Customer Setting 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 60.00 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 220.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 440.0 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0) 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 01.07 Output Frequency Upper Limit 0.1 to 120.0% 01.08 Output Frequency Lower Limit 0.0 to100.0 % 01.09 Accel Time 1 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.10 Decel Time 1 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.11 Accel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.12 Decel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 10.0 01.13 Jog Acceleration Time 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 01.14 Jog Deceleration Time 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 01.15 Jog Frequency 0.10 Hz to Fmax (Pr.01.00) Hz 110.0 0.0 1.0 1.0 6.00 0: Linear Accel/Decel 01.16 Auto acceleration / deceleration (refer to Accel/Decel time setting) 1: Auto Accel, Linear Decel 2: Linear Accel, Auto Decel 0 3: Auto Accel/Decel (Set by load) 4: Auto Accel/Decel (set by Accel/Decel Time setting) 4-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 01.17 Acceleration SCurve 0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec 0.0 01.18 Deceleration SCurve 0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec 0.0 01.19 Accel/Decel Time Unit 01.20 Delay Time at 0Hz for Simple Position 0.00 to 600.00 sec 01.21 Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position 0.00 to 600.00 sec 01.22 Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position 0.00 to 600.00 sec 01.23 Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position 0.00 to 600.00 sec 01.24 Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position 0.00 to 600.00 sec 01.25 Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position 0.00 to 600.00 sec 01.26 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 1) 01.27 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 1) 01.28 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 1) 01.29 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 1) 01.30 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 1) 01.31 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 1) 01.32 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 2) 0: Unit: 0.1 sec 1: Unit: 0.01 sec 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 60.00 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 220.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 440.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 60.00 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-5 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter 4-6 Explanation 01.33 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 2) 01.34 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 2) 01.35 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 2) 01.36 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 2) 01.37 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 2) 01.38 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 3) 01.39 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 3) 01.40 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 3) 01.41 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 3) 01.42 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 3) 01.43 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 3) Settings Factory Customer Setting 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 220.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 440.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 60.00 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 220.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 440.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 0.10 to 600.0 Hz 1.50 115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V 10.0 460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V 20.0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multifunction Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. 02.00 Source of First Master Frequency Command 1: 0 to +10V from AVI 2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2 1 3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication 4: Digital keypad potentiometer 5: CANopen communication 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 02.01 Source of First Operation Command 2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 1 4: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 5: CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 0: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: coast to stop 02.02 Stop Method 1: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: coast to stop 2: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop 0 3: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop 02.03 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections 02.04 Motor Direction Control 1 to 15kHz 8 0: Enable forward/reverse operation 1: Disable reverse operation 0 2: Disabled forward operation 02.05 Line Start Lockout 0: Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 1 1: Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-7 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 2: Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 3: Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 0: Decelerate to 0 Hz 02.06 Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA) 1: Coast to stop and display “AErr” 1 2: Continue operation by last frequency command 0: by UP/DOWN Key 02.07 Up/Down Mode 1: Based on accel/decel time 2: Constant speed (Pr.02.08) 0 3: Pulse input unit (Pr.02.08) 02.08 Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with Constant Speed 0.01~10.00 Hz 0.01 0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multifunction Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. 02.09 Source of Second Frequency Command 1: 0 to +10V from AVI 2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2 0 3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication 4: Digital keypad potentiometer 5: CANopen communication 02.10 4-8 Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command 0: First Master Frequency Command 1: First Master Frequency Command+ Second Master Frequency Command 0 2: First Master Frequency Command Second Master Frequency Command 02.11 Keypad Frequency Command 0.00 to 600.0Hz Communication Frequency Command 0.00 to 600.0Hz 02.12 60.00 60.00 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter 02.13 Explanation The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Save Keypad & Communication Frequency 1: Save Keypad Frequency only 0 2: Save Communication Frequency only 02.14 Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485/USB) 02.15 Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485/USB) 0: by Current Freq Command 1: by Zero Freq Command 0 2: by Frequency Display at Stop 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz 60.00 Read Only 02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00) Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09) Bit2=1: by Multi-input function ## Bit3=1: by PLC Freq command (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Read Only Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad 02.17 Display the Operation Command Source Bit1=1: by RS485 communication Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode ## Bit3=1: by Multi-input function Bit4=1: by PLC Operation Command (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings 0: No function 03.00 Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1) Factory Customer Setting 8 1: AC drive operational 2: Master frequency attained 3: Zero speed 4: Over torque detection 03.01 Multi-function Output Terminal MO1 1 5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication 6: Low-voltage indication 7: Operation mode indication Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-9 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 8: Fault indication 9: Desired frequency 1 attained 10: Terminal count value attained 11: Preliminary count value attained 12: Over Voltage Stall supervision 13: Over Current Stall supervision 14: Heat sink overheat warning 15: Over Voltage supervision 16: PID supervision 17: Forward command 18: Reverse command 19: Zero speed output signal 20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE) 21: Brake control (Desired frequency attained) 22: Drive ready 23: Desired frequency 2 attained 03.02 Desired Frequency 1 Attained 0.00 to 600.0Hz 03.03 Analog Output Signal Selection (AFM) 0: Analog frequency meter 1: Analog current meter 03.04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 200% 100 Terminal Count Value 0 to 9999 0 0 to 9999 0 0: Terminal count value attained, no EF display 0 03.05 03.06 Preliminary Count Value 03.07 EF Active When Terminal Count Value Attained 03.08 Fan Control 0.00 0 1: Terminal count value attained, EF active 0 0: Fan always ON 1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 2: Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 4-10 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 3: Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained Read only Bit0=1:RLY used by PLC Bit1=1:MO1 used by PLC 03.09 The Digital Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Bit2=1:MO2/RA2 used by PLC Bit3=1:MO3/RA3 used by PLC ## Bit4=1:MO4/RA4 used by PLC Bit5=1:MO5/RA5 used by PLC Bit6=1:MO6/RA6 used by PLC Bit7=1:MO7/RA7 used by PLC Read only 03.10 The Analog Output Used by PLC Bit0=1:AFM used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Bit1=1: AO1 used by PLC ## Bit2=1: AO2 used by PLC 03.11 Brake Release Frequency 0.00 to 20.00Hz 0.00 03.12 Brake Engage Frequency 0.00 to 20.00Hz 0.00 Read only Bit0: RLY Status Bit1: MO1 Status 03.13 Display the Status of Bit2: MO2/RA2 Status Bit3: MO3/RA3 Status Multi-function Output Terminals Bit4: MO4/RA4 Status ## Bit5: MO5/RA5 Status Bit6: MO6/RA6 Status Bit7: MO7/RA7 Status 03.14 Desired Frequency 2 Attained 0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00 Group 4 Input Function Parameters Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation 04.00 Keypad Potentiometer Bias 04.01 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity 04.02 Keypad Potentiometer Gain 04.03 04.04 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control Modes Settings 0.0 to 100.0 % Factory Customer Setting 0.0 0: Positive bias 00 1: Negative bias 0.1 to 200.0 % 100.0 0: No negative bias command 0 1: Negative bias: REV motion enabled 0: 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 1: 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP 0 2: 3-wire operation 04.05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3) 0: No function 1 1: Multi-Step speed command 1 2: Multi-Step speed command 2 04.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4) 3: Multi-Step speed command 3 2 4: Multi-Step speed command 4 5: External reset 04.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5) 6: Accel/Decel inhibit 3 7: Accel/Decel time selection command 8: Jog Operation 04.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6) 9: External base block 4 10: Up: Increment master frequency 11: Down: Decrement master frequency 12: Counter Trigger Signal 13: Counter reset 14: E.F. External Fault Input 15: PID function disabled 16: Output shutoff stop 4-12 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 17: Parameter lock enable 18: Operation command selection (external terminals) 19: Operation command selection(keypad) 20: Operation command selection (communication) 21: FWD/REV command 22: Source of second frequency command 23: Run/Stop PLC Program (PLC1) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models) 24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program (PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 25: Simple position function 26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection) 27: Motor selection (bit 0) 28: Motor selection (bit 1) Bit0:MI1 Bit1:MI2 Bit2:MI3 Bit3:MI4 Bit4:MI5 Bit5:MI6 04.09 Multi-function Input Contact Selection Bit6:MI7 Bit7:MI8 0 Bit8:MI9 Bit9:MI10 Bit10:MI11 Bit11:MI12 0:N.O., 1:N.C. P.S.:MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3wire control. 04.10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time 1 to 20 (*2ms) 04.11 Min AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 04.12 Min AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1 0.0 0.0 4-13 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 04.13 Max AVI Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 10.0 04.14 Max AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 04.15 Min ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 4.0 04.16 Min ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 04.17 Max ACI Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 20.0 04.18 Max ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 04.19 ACI/AVI2 Selection 04.20 Min AVI2 Voltage 04.21 Min AVI2 Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 04.22 Max AVI2 Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 10.0 04.23 Max AVI2 Frequency 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 0.0 0: ACI 0 1: AVI2 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0 Read only Bit0=1:MI1 used by PLC Bit1=1:MI2 used by PLC Bit2=1:MI3 used by PLC Bit3=1:MI4 used by PLC 04.24 The Digital Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Bit4=1:MI5 used by PLC Bit5=1:MI6 used by PLC ## Bit6=1: MI7 used by PLC Bit7=1: MI8 used by PLC Bit8=1: MI9 used by PLC Bit9=1: MI10 used by PLC Bit10=1: MI11 used by PLC Bit11=1: MI12 used by PLC 4-14 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Read only 04.25 The Analog Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Bit0=1:AVI used by PLC Bit1=1:ACI/AVI2 used by PLC ## Bit2=1: AI1 used by PLC Bit3=1: AI2 used by PLC Read only Bit0: MI1 Status Bit1: MI2 Status Bit2: MI3 Status Bit3: MI4 Status 04.26 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal Bit4: MI5 Status ## Bit5: MI6 Status Bit6: MI7 Status Bit7: MI8 Status Bit8: MI9 Status Bit9: MI10 Status Bit10: MI11 Status Bit11: MI12 Status Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection 0~4095 0 04.27 04.28 Internal Terminal Status 0~4095 0 Group 5 Multi-Step Speeds Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 05.00 1st Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.01 2nd Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-15 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 05.02 3rd Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.03 4th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.04 5th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.05 6th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.06 7th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.07 8th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.08 9th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.09 10th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.10 11th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.11 12th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.12 13th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.13 14th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 05.14 15th Step Speed Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 Group 6 Protection Parameters Parameter Explanation 06.00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention 06.01 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Accel Settings Factory Customer Setting 115/230V series: 330.0V to 410.0V 390.0V 460V series: 660.0V to 820.0V 780.0V 0.0: Disable over-voltage stall prevention 4-16 0:Disable 20 to 250% 170 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter 06.02 Explanation Over-Current Stall Prevention during Operation Settings 0:Disable 20 to 250% Factory Customer Setting 170 0: Disabled 1: Enabled during constant speed operation. After the over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2) 0 2: Enabled during constant speed operation. After the over-torque is detected, stop running. 3: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 4: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque is detected, stop running. 06.04 06.05 06.06 Over-Torque Detection Level 10 to 200% 150 Over-Torque Detection Time 0.1 to 60.0 sec 0.1 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection 0: Standard motor (self cooled by fan) 1: Special motor (forced external cooling) 2 2: Disabled 06.07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic 30 to 600 sec 60 0: No fault 0 1: Over current (oc) 06.08 Present Fault Record 2: Over voltage (ov) 3: IGBT Overheat (oH1) 4: Power Board Overheat (oH2) 5: Overload (oL) 6: Overload1 (oL1) 7: Motor over load (oL2) 06.09 Second Most 8: External fault (EF) Recent Fault Record 9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-17 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd) 11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn) 12: Ground fault (GFF) 13: Reserved 14: Phase-Loss (PHL) 15: Reserved 16: Auto Acel/Decel failure (CFA) 06.10 Third Most Recent Fault Record 17: SW/Password protection (codE) 18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.0) 19: Power Board CPU READ failure (cF2.0) 20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1) 06.11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2) 22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3) 23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4) 24: U-phase error (cF3.0) 06.12 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 25: V-phase error (cF3.1) 26: W-phase error (cF3.2) 27: DCBUS error (cF3.3) 28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4) 29: Power Board Overheat (cF3.5) 30: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1) 31: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF2.1) 32: ACI signal error (AErr) 33: Reserved 34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1) 35-39: Reserved 40: Communication time-out error of control board and power board (CP10) 4-18 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter 07.00 07.01 07.02 07.03 07.04 Explanation Settings Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA (Motor 0) Factory Customer Setting FLA Motor No-Load Current (Motor 0) 0%FLA to 99% FLA Torque Compensation (Motor 0) 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 0.00 to 10.00 0.00 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0) Motor Parameters Auto Tuning 0.4*FLA 0: Disable 1: Auto tuning R1 0 2: Auto tuning R1 + no-load test 07.05 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 0) 0~65535 mΩ 07.06 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0) 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 3.00 07.07 Slip Compensation Limit 0 to 250% 200 07.08 Torque Compensation Time Constant 0.01 ~10.00 Sec 0.10 07.09 Slip Compensation Time Constant 0.05 ~10.00 sec 0.20 07.10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.) 0 to 1439 Min. 0 07.11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day) 0 to 65535 Day 0 07.12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection 07.13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection 0: Disable 1: Enable 0~9999(*2ms) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 0 0 100 4-19 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Factory Customer Setting Parameter Explanation 07.14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level 0.1~10.0V 2.4 07.15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level 0.1~10.0V 1.2 07.16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level 0.1~5.0V 0.6 07.17 Treatment of the Motor PTC Overheat 0: Warn and RAMP to stop 1: Warn and COAST to stop 0 2: Warn and keep running 07.18 Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA (Motor 1) 07.19 Motor No-Load Current (Motor 1) 0%FLA to 99% FLA 07.20 Torque Compensation (Motor 1) 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 07.21 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 1) 0.00 to 10.00 0.00 07.22 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 1) 0~65535 mΩ 0 07.23 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 1) 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 07.24 Motor Pole Number (Motor 1) 2 to 10 07.25 Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA (Motor 2) 07.26 Motor No-Load Current (Motor 2) 0%FLA to 99% FLA 07.27 Torque Compensation (Motor 2) 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 07.28 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 2) 0.00 to 10.00 0.00 4-20 FLA 0.4*FLA 3.00 4 FLA 0.4*FLA Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 07.29 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 2) 0~65535 mΩ 07.30 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 2) 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 07.31 Motor Pole Number (Motor 3) 2 to 10 07.32 Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA (Motor 3) 07.33 Motor No-Load Current (Motor 3) 0%FLA to 99% FLA 07.34 Torque Compensation (Motor 3) 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 07.35 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 3) 0.00 to 10.00 0.00 07.36 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 3) 0~65535 mΩ 0 07.37 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 3) 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 07.38 Motor Pole Number (Motor 3) 2 to 10 0 3.00 4 FLA 0.4*FLA 3.00 4 Group 8 Special Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 08.00 DC Brake Current Level 0 to 100% 08.01 DC Brake Time during Start-Up 0.0 to 60.0 sec 0.0 08.02 DC Brake Time during Stopping 0.0 to 60.0 sec 0.0 0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00 08.03 Start-Point for DC Brake Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 0 4-21 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Operation stops after momentary power loss 08.04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value 0 2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the minimum frequency 08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time 08.06 Base-block Speed Search 0.1 to 5.0 sec 2.0 0: Disable speed search 1: Speed search starts with last frequency command 1 2: Starts with minimum output frequency 08.07 B.B. Time for Speed 0.1 to 5.0 sec Search 0.5 08.08 Current Limit for Speed Search 30 to 200% 150 08.09 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.10 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.11 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.12 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.13 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.14 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 08.15 Auto Restart After Fault 0 to 10 (0=disable) 08.16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault 0.1 to 6000 sec 08.17 Auto Energy Saving 0 60.0 0: Disable 4-22 1: Enable 0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: AVR function enable 08.18 AVR Function 1: AVR function disable 0 2: AVR function disable for decel. 3: AVR function disable for stop 08.19 Software Brake Level 115V / 230V series: 370.0to 430.0V 380.0 460V series: 740.0 to 860.0V 760.0 Compensation 0.0~5.0 Coefficient for Motor Instability 0.0 08.21 OOB Sampling Time 0.1 to 120.0 sec 1.0 08.22 Number of OOB Sampling Times 00 to 32 20 08.23 OOB Average Sampling Angle Read only 08.24 DEB Function 08.25 DEB Return Time 08.20 #.# 0: Disable 0 1: Enable 0 to 250 sec 0 Group 9 Communication Parameters Parameter 09.00 Explanation Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Customer Setting 1 0: Baud rate 4800bps 09.01 Transmission Speed 1: Baud rate 9600bps 2: Baud rate 19200bps 1 3: Baud rate 38400bps 0: Warn and keep operating 09.02 Transmission Fault Treatment 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop 3 3: No warning and keep operating Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-23 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter 09.03 Explanation Time-out Detection Settings 0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds 0.0: Disable Factory Customer Setting 0.0 0: 7,N,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 1: 7,E,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 09.04 Communication Protocol 2: 7,O,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 3: 8,N,2 (Modbus, RTU) 0 4: 8,E,1 (Modbus, RTU) 5: 8,O,1 (Modbus, RTU) 6: 8,N,1 (Modbus, RTU) 7: 8,E,2 (Modbus, RTU) 8: 8,O,2 (Modbus, RTU) 9: 7,N,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 10: 7,E,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 11: 7,O,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 09.05 Reserved 09.06 Reserved 09.07 Response Delay Time 0 ~ 200 (unit: 2ms) 1 0: Baud rate 4800 bps 09.08 1: Baud rate 9600 bps Transmission Speed 2: Baud rate 19200 bps for USB Card 3: Baud rate 38400 bps 2 4: Baud rate 57600 bps 0: 7,N,2 for ASCII 1: 7,E,1 for ASCII 09.09 Communication Protocol for USB Card 2: 7,O,1 for ASCII 3: 8,N,2 for RTU 1 4: 8,E,1 for RTU 5: 8,O,1 for RTU 4-24 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 6: 8,N,1 (Modbus, RTU) 7: 8,E,2 (Modbus, RTU) 09.09 Communication Protocol for USB Card 8: 8,O,2 (Modbus, RTU) 9: 7,N,1 (Modbus, ASCII) 10: 7,E,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 11: 7,O,2 (Modbus, ASCII) 0: Warn and keep operating 09.10 Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop 0 3: No warning and keep operating 09.11 09.12 Time-out Detection for USB Card 0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds COM port for PLC Communication 0: RS485 0.0: Disable 1: USB card 0.0 0 (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Group 10 PID Control Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Disable PID operation 1: Keypad (based on Pr.02.00) 10.00 PID Set Point Selection 2: 0 to +10V from AVI 0 3: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2 4: PID set point (Pr.10.11) 0: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC) 1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC) 10.01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback 2: Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC). 0 3: Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC). Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-25 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 10.02 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 10.03 Integral Time (I) 0.00 to 100.0 sec (0.00=disable) 1.00 10.04 Derivative Control (D) 0.00 to 1.00 sec 0.00 10.05 Upper Bound for Integral Control 0 to 100% 100 10.06 Primary Delay Filter Time 0.0 to 2.5 sec 0.0 10.07 PID Output Freq Limit 0 to 110% 100 10.08 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time 0.0 to 3600 sec (0.0 disable) 60.0 10.09 Treatment of the Erroneous PID Feedback Signals 10.10 Gain Over the PID Detection Value 0: Warn and RAMP to stop 1: Warn and COAST to stop 0 2: Warn and keep operation 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 Source of PID Set point 0.00 to 600.0Hz 10.12 PID Offset Level 1.0 to 50.0% 10.0 10.13 Detection Time of PID Offset 0.1 to 300.0 sec 5.0 10.14 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time 0.0 to 6550 sec 0.0 10.15 Sleep Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 10.16 Wakeup Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz 0.00 10.17 Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection 0: By PID control 10.11 0.00 1: By minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05) 0 Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card 4-26 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: No function 11.00 Multi-function Output Terminal MO2/RA2 1: AC drive operational 0 2: Master frequency attained 3: Zero speed 4: Over torque detection 11.01 Multi-function Output Terminal MO3/RA3 5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication 6: Low-voltage indication 0 7: Operation mode indication 8: Fault indication 11.02 Multi-function Output Terminal MO4/RA4 9: Desired frequency 1 attained 10: Terminal count value attained 0 11: Preliminary count value attained 12: Over Voltage Stall supervision 11.03 Multi-function Output Terminal MO5/RA5 13: Over Current Stall supervision 0 14: Heat sink overheat warning 15: Over Voltage supervision 16: PID supervision 11.04 Multi-function Output Terminal MO6/RA6 17: Forward command 18: Reverse command 0 19: Zero speed output signal 20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE) 11.05 Multi-function Output Terminal MO7/RA7 21: Brake control (Desired frequency attained) 0 22: Drive ready 23: Desired frequency 2 attained 0: No function 11.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI7) 0 1: Multi-Step speed command 1 2: Multi-Step speed command 2 11.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) 3: Multi-Step speed command 3 0 4: Multi-Step speed command 4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-27 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 5: External reset 6: Accel/Decel inhibit 11.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI9) 0 7: Accel/Decel time selection command 8: Jog Operation 9: External base block 11.09 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI10) 0 10: Up: Increment master frequency 11: Down: Decrement master frequency 12: Counter Trigger Signal 11.10 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI11) 0 13: Counter reset 14: E.F. External Fault Input 15: PID function disabled 11.11 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI12) 16: Output shutoff stop 0 17: Parameter lock enable 18: Operation command selection (external terminals) 19: Operation command selection (keypad) 20: Operation command selection (communication) 21: FWD/REV command 22: Source of second frequency command 23: Run/Stop PLC Program (PLC1) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models) 24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program (PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 25: Simple position function 26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection) 27: Motor selection (bit 0) 28: Motor selection (bit 1) 4-28 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Disabled 1: Source of the 1st frequency 12.00 AI1 Function Selection 2: Source of the 2nd frequency 3: PID Set Point (PID enable) 0 4: Positive PID feedback 5: Negative PID feedback 0: ACI2 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA) 12.01 AI1 Analog Signal Mode 12.02 Min. AVI3 Input Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0 12.03 Min. AVI3 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 12.04 Max. AVI3 Input Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 10.0 12.05 Max. AVI3 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 12.06 Min. ACI2 Input Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 4.0 12.07 Min. ACI2 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 12.08 Max. ACI2 Input Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 20.0 12.09 Max. ACI2 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 1: AVI3 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V) 1 0: Disabled 1: Source of the 1st frequency 12.10 AI2 Function Selection 2: Source of the 2nd frequency 3: PID Set Point (PID enable) 0 4: Positive PID feedback 5: Negative PID feedback 12.11 AI2 Analog Signal Mode 0: ACI3 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA) 1: AVI4 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1 4-29 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 12.12 Min. AVI4 Input Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0 12.13 Min. AVI4 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 12.14 Max. AVI4 Input Voltage 0.0 to 10.0V 10.0 12.15 Max. AVI4 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 12.16 Min. ACI3 Input Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 4.0 12.17 Min. ACI3 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 12.18 Max. ACI3 Input Current 0.0 to 20.0mA 20.0 12.19 Max. ACI3 Scale Percentage 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0 12.20 0: AVO1 AO1 Terminal 1: ACO1 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA) Analog Signal Mode 0 2: ACO1 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA) 12.21 AO1 Analog Output Signal 12.22 AO1 Analog Output Gain 12.23 0: Analog Frequency 1: Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current) 1 to 200% 0 100 0: AVO2 AO2 Terminal 1: ACO2 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA) Analog Signal Mode 0 2: ACO2 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA) 12.24 AO2 Analog Output Signal 12.25 AO2 Analog Output Gain 4-30 0: Analog Frequency 1: Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current) 1 to 200% 0 100 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Disabled 13.00 PG Input 1: Single phase 0 2: Forward/Counterclockwise rotation 3: Reverse/Clockwise rotation 13.01 PG Pulse Range 1 to 20000 13.02 Motor Pole Number (Motor 0) 2 to 10 13.03 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 13.04 Integral Gain (I) 0.00 to 100.00 sec 1.00 13.05 Speed Control Output Frequency Limit 0.00 to 100.00Hz 10.00 13.06 Speed Feedback Display Filter 0 to 9999 (*2ms) 500 13.07 Detection Time for Feedback Signal Fault 13.08 Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault 13.09 Speed Feedback Filter 13.10 Source of the Highspeed Counter 0.0: disabled 0.1 to 10.0 sec 600 4 1 0: Warn and RAMP to stop 1: Warn and COAST to stop 1 2: Warn and keep operation 0 to 9999 (*2ms) 0: PG card 1: PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 16 Read Only 4-31 Chapter 4 Parameters| 4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications Speed Search Applications Windmill, winding machine, fan and all inertia loads Purpose Restart freerunning motor Functions Before the free-running motor is completely stopped, it can be restarted without detection of motor speed. The AC motor drive will auto search motor speed and will accelerate when its speed is the same as the motor speed. Related Parameters 08.04~08.08 DC Brake before Running Applications Purpose Keep the freeWhen e.g. windmills, fans and pumps rotate running motor at freely by wind or flow standstill. without applying power Functions If the running direction of the freerunning motor is not steady, please execute DC brake before start-up. Related Parameters 08.00 08.01 Energy Saving Applications Punching machines fans, pumps and precision machinery Purpose Energy saving and less vibrations Functions Energy saving when the AC motor drive runs at constant speed, yet full power acceleration and deceleration For precision machinery it also helps to lower vibrations. Related Parameters 08.17 Multi-step Operation Applications Conveying machinery Purpose Functions Cyclic operation by To control 15-step speeds and duration multi-step speeds. by simple contact signals. Related Parameters 04.05~04.08 05.00~05.14 Switching acceleration and deceleration times Applications Auto turntable for conveying machinery 4-32 Purpose Functions Switching acceleration and deceleration times by external signal When an AC motor drive drives two or more motors, it can reach high-speed but still start and stop smoothly. Related Parameters 01.09~01.12 04.05~04.08 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Overheat Warning Applications Air conditioner Purpose Safety measure Functions When AC motor drive overheats, it uses a thermal sensor to have overheat warning. Related Parameters 03.00~03.01 04.05~04.08 Two-wire/three-wire Applications General application Purpose To run, stop, forward and reverse by external terminals Functions FWD/STOP MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":FWD) REV/STOP MI2:("OPEN": STOP) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM VFD-E RUN/STOP MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":RUN) FWD/REV MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM VFD-E Related Parameters 02.00 02.01 02.09 04.04 3-wire STOP RUN MI1 : ("CLOSE":RUN) MI3:("OPEN":STOP) REV/FWD MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM VFD-E Operation Command Applications General application Functions Related Parameters Selection of AC motor drive control by external terminals, digital keypad or RS485. 02.01 04.05~04.08 Functions Related Parameters Purpose Selecting the source of control signal Frequency Hold Applications General application Purpose Acceleration/ Hold output frequency during deceleration pause Acceleration/deceleration Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 04.05~04.08 4-33 Chapter 4 Parameters| Auto Restart after Fault Applications Air conditioners, remote pumps Purpose Functions For continuous and The AC motor drive can be reliable operation restarted/reset automatically up to 10 without operator times after a fault occurs. intervention Related Parameters 08.15~08.16 Emergency Stop by DC Brake Applications High-speed rotors Purpose Emergency stop without brake resistor Functions AC motor drive can use DC brake for emergency stop when quick stop is needed without brake resistor. When used often, take motor cooling into consideration. Related Parameters 08.00 08.02 08.03 Over-torque Setting Applications Pumps, fans and extruders Purpose To protect machines and to have continuous/ reliable operation Functions The over-torque detection level can be set. Once OC stall, OV stall and overtorque occurs, the output frequency will be adjusted automatically. It is suitable for machines like fans and pumps that require continuous operation. Related Parameters 06.00~06.05 Upper/Lower Limit Frequency Applications Pump and fan Purpose Control the motor speed within upper/lower limit Functions When user cannot provide upper/lower limit, gain or bias from external signal, it can be set individually in AC motor drive. Related Parameters 01.07 01.08 Skip Frequency Setting Applications Pumps and fans 4-34 Purpose To prevent machine vibrations Functions The AC motor drive cannot run at constant speed in the skip frequency range. Three skip frequency ranges can be set. Related Parameters 08.09~08.14 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Carrier Frequency Setting Applications General application Purpose Low noise Functions The carrier frequency can be increased when required to reduce motor noise. Related Parameters 02.03 Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost Applications Air conditioners Purpose For continuous operation Functions When the frequency command is lost by system malfunction, the AC motor drive can still run. Suitable for intelligent air conditioners. Related Parameters 02.06 Output Signal during Running Applications General application Purpose Functions Signal available to stop braking (brake release) when the AC motor drive is Provide a signal for running. (This signal will disappear running status when the AC motor drive is freerunning.) Related Parameters 03.00~03.01 Output Signal in Zero Speed Applications General application Purpose Functions When the output frequency is lower Provide a signal for than the min. output frequency, a running status signal is given for external system or control wiring. Related Parameters 03.00~03.01 Output Signal at Desired Frequency Applications General application Purpose Functions When the output frequency is at the desired frequency (by frequency Provide a signal for command), a signal is given for running status external system or control wiring (frequency attained). Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Related Parameters 03.00~03.01 4-35 Chapter 4 Parameters| Output Signal for Base Block Applications General application Purpose Functions When executing Base Block, a signal Provide a signal for is given for external system or control running status wiring. Related Parameters 03.00~03.01 Overheat Warning for Heat Sink Applications General application Purpose For safety Functions When heat sink is overheated, it will send a signal for external system or control wiring. Related Parameters 03.00~03.01 Multi-function Analog Output Applications General application 4-36 Purpose Display running status Functions The value of frequency, output current/voltage can be read by connecting a frequency meter or voltage/current meter. Related Parameters 03.06 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 4.3 Description of Parameter Settings Group 0: User Parameters 00.00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Settings 00.01 Read Only Factory setting: ## Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive Settings This parameter can be set during operation. Read Only Factory setting: #.# Pr. 00.00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor drive correspond to the identity code. Pr.00.01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user can check if the AC motor drive is correct. kW HP Pr.00-00 Rated Output Current (A) Max. Carrier Frequency 0.2 0.25 0 0.4 0.5 2 115V/230V Series 0.75 1.5 1.0 2.0 4 6 1.6 2.5 4.2 kW HP Pr.00-00 Rated Output Current (A) Max. Carrier Frequency 0.4 0.5 3 0.75 1.0 5 1.5 2.0 7 1.5 2.5 4.2 00.02 7.5 2.2 3.0 8 3.7 5.0 10 5.5 7.5 12 7.5 10 14 11.0 17 25 33 3.7 5.0 11 5.5 7.5 13 7.5 10 15 11 15 17 8.5 13 18 24 15kHz 460V Series 2.2 3.0 9 5.5 15kHz Parameter Reset Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Parameter can be read/written 1 All parameters are read-only 6 Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 9 All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12) 10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 115V/220V/440V) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-37 Chapter 4 Parameters| This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault records (Pr.06.08 ~ Pr.06.12). 50Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 50Hz and Pr.01.02 will be set by Pr.00.12. 60Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 60Hz and Pr.01.02 is set to 115V, 230V or 460V. When Pr.00.02=1, all parameters are read-only. To write all parameters, set Pr.00.02=0. 00.03 Start-up Display Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Display the frequency command value (Fxxx) 1 Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx) 2 Display the output current in A supplied to the motor (Axxx) 3 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 4 FWD/REV command 5 PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. For setting 5, PLC0: disable, PLC1: run PLC, PLC2: read/write PLC programs into AC motor drive. 00.04 Content of Multi-function Display Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 1 4-38 Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) Display the counter value which counts the number of pulses on TRG terminal 2 Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 3 Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC motor drive 4 Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to the motor. 5 Display PID analog feedback signal value in % Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 00.04 Content of Multi-function Display 6 Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to the motor 7 Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W to the motor. 8 Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates to current. 9 10 Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal (mA)or display the signal of AVI2 analog input terminal-(V). 11 Display the temperature of IGBT (h) in °C 12 Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.) 13 Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.) 14 Display PG speed in RPM (G) 15 Display motor number (M) When Pr00.03 is set to 03, the display is according to the setting of Pr00.04. 00.05 User Defined Coefficient K Settings Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal (V). 0. 1 to d 160.0 Unit: 0. 1 Factory Setting: 1.0 The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user-defined unit. The display value is calculated as follows: U (User-defined unit) = Actual output frequency * K (Pr.00.05) Example: A conveyor belt runs at 13.6m/s at motor speed 60Hz. K = 13.6/60 = 0.22 (0.226667 rounded to 1 decimal), therefore Pr.00.05=0.2 With Frequency command 35Hz, display shows U and 35*0.2=7.0m/s. (To increase accuracy, use K=2.2 or K=22.7 and disregard decimal point.) 00.06 Power Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display #.## Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-39 Chapter 4 Parameters| 00.07 00.08 Control Board Software Version Settings Read Only Display #.## Unit: 1 Password Input Settings 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 Display 0~2 (times of wrong password) The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00.09. Input the correct password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts. After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “codE” will show up to force the user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password. 00.09 Password Set Unit: 1 Settings 0 to 9999 Display 0 No password set or successful input in Pr. 00.08 Factory Setting: 0 1 Password has been set To set a password to protect your parameter settings. If the display shows 0, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00.08. All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00.09. The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display will show 1. Be sure to record the password for later use. To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr. 00.08. The password consists of min. 1 digits and max. 4 digits. How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00.08: Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00.09 (Or you can enter a new password if you want to use a changed or new one). Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered. Password Decode Flow Chart 4-40 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 00.08 00.09 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr.00.08. Incorrect Password END Correct Password END 00.09 00.08 Displays 0 when entering correct password into Pr.00.08. 3 chances to enter the correct password. 1st time displays "1" if password is incorrect. 2nd time displays "2", if password is incorrect. 3rd time displays " code" (blinking) If the password was entered incorrectly after three tries, the keypad will be locked. Turn the power OFF/ON to re-enter the password. 00.10 Control Method Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 V/f Control 1 Vector Control This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive. 00.11 Reserved 00.12 50Hz Base Voltage Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 230V/400V 1 220V/380V This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-41 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 1: Basic Parameters 01.00 Unit: 0.01 Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax) Settings 50.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 60.00 This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V and 4 to 20mA) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range. 01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 0) Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 60.00 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v/f curve ratio. For example, if the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz, the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (460V/60Hz=7.66V/Hz). This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03). 01.02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 220.0 460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 440.0 This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. The Maximum Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04). 01.03 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 0) Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.50 This parameter sets the Mid-Point Frequency of the V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point frequency can be determined. This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) and equal to or less than Maximum Voltage Frequency (Pr.01.01). 4-42 This setting must be greater than Pr.01.05. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 01.04 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0) Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V 460V series 0.1 to 510.0V Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 10.0 Factory Setting: 20.0 This parameter sets the Mid-Point Voltage of any V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point Frequency can be determined. This parameter must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage (Pr.01.06) and equal to or less than Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). This setting should be greater than Pr.01.06. 01.05 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0) Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.50 This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive. This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03). The settings of 01.03, 01.04, and 01.06 are invalid in Vector Control mode. 01.06 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0) Settings Unit: 0.1 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 460V series Factory Setting: 20.0 0.1 to 510.0V This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. This parameter must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04). The settings of Pr.01.01 to Pr.01.06 have to meet the condition of Pr.01.02 ≥ Pr.01.04 ≥ Pr.01.06 and Pr.01.01 ≥ Pr.01.03 ≥ Pr.01.05. In vector control mode (Pr.00.10 is set to 1), Pr.01.03, Pr.01.04 and Pr.01.06 are disabled. 01.07 Output Frequency Upper Limit Settings 0.1 to 120.0% Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 110.0 This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr.01.08). The Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) is regarded as 100%. Output Frequency Upper Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.07)/100. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-43 Chapter 4 Parameters| 01.08 Voltage 01.07 Output Frequency Lower Limit Output Frequency Upper Limit 01.02 Maximum Output Voltage 01.04 Mid-point Voltage The limit of Output Frequency Frequency 01.06 Minimum 01.05 Output Voltage Minimum Output Freq. 01.03 Mid-point Freq. 01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Base Frequency) 01.00 Maximum Output Frequency V/f Curve 01.08 Unit: 0.1 Output Frequency Lower Limit Settings 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0 The Upper/Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage. If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz, the Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz. If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz, and the Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is set to 1.0Hz, then any Command Frequency between 1.0-10Hz will generate a 10Hz output from the drive. This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit (Pr.01.07). The Output Frequency Lower Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.08) /100. 01.09 Acceleration Time 1 (Taccel 1) 01.10 Deceleration Time 1 (Tdecel 1) Unit: 0.1/0.01 01.11 Acceleration Time 2 (Taccel 2) Unit: 0.1/0.01 01.12 Deceleration Time 2 (Tdecel 2) Settings Unit: 0.1/0.01 Unit: 0.1/0.01 0.1 to 600.0 sec / 0.01 to 600.0 sec Factory Setting: 10.0 Acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3~ MI12 to 7 (set Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 7 or Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11 to 7). 01.19 Accel/Decel Time Unit Factory Setting: 0 Settings 4-44 0 Unit: 0.1 sec 1 Unit: 0.01 sec Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). The rate is linear unless S-Curve is “Enabled”; see Pr.01.17. The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) down to 0 Hz. The rate is linear unless S-Curve is “Enabled.”, see Pr.01.18. The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input Terminals Settings. See Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for more details. In the diagram shown below, the Acceleration/Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). Suppose the Maximum Output Frequency is 60 Hz, Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is 1.0 Hz, and Acceleration/Deceleration Time is 10 seconds. The actual time for the AC motor drive to accelerate from start-up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1.0Hz is in this case 9.83 seconds. ((60-1) * 10/60=9.83secs). Frequency 01.00 Max. output Frequency setting operation frequency 01.05 Min. output frequency 0 Hz Decel. Time Accel. Time 01.09 01.11 01.10 Time 01.12 The definition of Accel./Decel. Time Resulting Decel. Time Resulting Accel. Time Resulting Accel./Decel. Time 01.13 Jog Acceleration Time Settings 01.14 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec Jog Deceleration Time Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Unit: 0.1/0.01 Factory Setting: 1.0 Unit: 0.1/0.01 Factory Setting: 1.0 4-45 Chapter 4 Parameters| 01.15 Jog Frequency Settings Unit: 0.01 0.10 to Fmax (Pr.01.00)Hz Factory Setting: 6.00 Only external terminal JOG (MI3 to MI12) can be used. When the Jog command is “ON”, the AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) to Jog Frequency (Pr.01.15). When the Jog command is “OFF”, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The used Accel/Decel time is set by the Jog Accel/Decel time (Pr.01.13, Pr.01.14). Before using the JOG command, the drive must be stopped first. And during Jog operation, other operation commands are not accepted, except commands via the FORWARD, REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad. Frequency 01.15 JOG Frequency 01.05 Min. output frequency 0 Hz JOG Decel. Time JOG Accel. Time Time 01.14 01.12 01.13 The definition of JOG Accel./Decel. Time01.21 01.16 Auto-Acceleration / Deceleration Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Linear acceleration / deceleration 1 Auto acceleration, linear Deceleration. 2 Linear acceleration, auto Deceleration. 3 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load) 4 Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting) With Auto acceleration / deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during starting/stopping the load. During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current. 4-46 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| During Auto deceleration, regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped with the fastest deceleration time. But when this parameter is set to 04, the actual accel/decel time will be equal to or more than parameter Pr.01.09 ~Pr.01.12. Auto acceleration/deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary. It makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration without brake resistor. In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, Auto deceleration shall not be used. 01.17 Acceleration S-Curve 01.18 Deceleration S-Curve Unit: 0.1/0.01 Unit: 0.1/0.01 Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0.0 S-curve disabled 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00 S-curve enabled (10.0/10.00 is the smoothest) This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S-curve. The S-curve is disabled when set to 0.0 and enabled when set to 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00. Setting 0.1/0.01 gives the quickest and setting 10.0/10.00 the longest and smoothest S-curve. The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel/Decel Times in Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12. The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel/Decel Time is only for reference when the S-curve is enabled. The actual Accel/Decel Time depends on the selected S-curve (0.1 to 10.0). The total Accel. Time=Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.17 or Pr.01.11 + Pr.01.17 The total Decel. Time=Pr.01.10 + Pr.01.18 or Pr.01.12 + Pr.01.18 2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4 1 2 Disable S curve 3 4 Enable S curve Acceleration/deceleration Characteristics Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-47 Chapter 4 Parameters| 01.20 Delay Time at 0Hz for Simple Position Unit: 0.01 01.21 Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position Unit: 0.01 01.22 Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position Unit: 0.01 01.23 Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position Unit: 0.01 01.24 Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position Unit: 0.01 01.25 Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position Settings Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 sec Factory Setting: 0.00 This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation area. When the multifunction input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON, it will start to decelerate after getting the delay time from Pr.01.20 to Pr.01.25 and get the final position. This is simple position function NOT the precision position function. f MI=25 tx t t2 ⎛ t + (t x + t 2 ) ⎞ S = f ×⎜ x ⎟ 2 ⎝ ⎠ Assume that the radius of the 4-pole motor is r and rotation speed is n (rpm). n r Example 1: Assume that motor speed is 50Hz, the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec (Pr.01.25=2) and the deceleration time from 50Hz to 0Hz is 10 seconds. The rotation speed n = 120 X 50 /4 (rpm/min) = 25 rpm/sec The revolution numbers = (25 X (2+12))/2 = 175 (revolutions) f (Hz) 50 t MI=25 4-48 2sec 10sec Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Therefore, the distance = revolution numbers X circumference = 175 X 2π r It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles. Example 2: Assume that motor speed is 1.5Hz, the delay time at 10Hz is 10 sec (Pr.01.21=10) and the deceleration time from 60Hz to 0Hz is 40 seconds. The delay time at 1.5Hz is 1.5 sec and the deceleration from 1.5Hz to 0Hz is 1 sec. The rotation speed n = 120 X 1.5 /4 (rpm/min) = 1.5/2 rpm/sec = 0.75 rpm/sec The revolution numbers = (1.5/2X (1.5+2.5))/2 = 1.5 (revolutions) f (Hz) 1.5 t 1.5sec MI=25 1sec Therefore, the distance = revolution numbers X circumference = 1.5 X 2π r It also means that the motor will stop after running 1.5 circles. 01.26 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 1) Settings 01.27 0.10 to 600.0Hz Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 1) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 220.0 460V series 01.28 0.1 to 510.0V Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 1) Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz 01.29 460V series 01.31 Unit: 0.01 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 10.0 Factory Setting: 20.0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.50 Unit: 0.1 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 460V series Factory Setting: 20.0 0.1 to 510.0V Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 2) Settings 01.33 0.10 to 600.0Hz Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 1) Settings 01.32 0.1 to 510.0V Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 1) Settings Factory Setting: 440.0 Factory Setting: 1.50 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 1) Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V 01.30 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 60.00 0.10 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 60.00 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 2) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 220.0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-49 Chapter 4 Parameters| 460V series 01.34 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 440.0 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 2) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz 01.35 Factory Setting: 1.50 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 2) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V 460V series 01.36 0.10 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 10.0 460V series Factory Setting: 20.0 0.1 to 510.0V Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 3) 0.10 to 600.0Hz Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 3) Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 220.0 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 440.0 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 3) Unit: 0.01 Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz 01.41 Factory Setting: 1.50 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 3) Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V 460V series 01.42 0.1 to 510.0V Factory Setting: 20.0 0.10 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.50 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 3) Settings Factory Setting: 10.0 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 3) Settings 01.43 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 60.00 Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V 460V series 01.40 Unit: 0.1 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Settings 01.39 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.50 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 2) Settings 01.38 Factory Setting: 20.0 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 2) Settings 01.37 Factory Setting: 10.0 0.1 to 510.0V Unit: 0.1 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 460V series Factory Setting: 20.0 0.1 to 510.0V The V/f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28. Group 2: Operation Method Parameters 02.00 Source of First Master Frequency Command Factory Setting: 1 02.09 Source of Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting: 0 Settings 4-50 0 Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. (Digital keypad is optional) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 1 0 to +10V from AVI 2 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2 3 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication 4 Digital keypad potentiometer 5 CANopen communication These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive. The factory setting for master frequency command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.) Setting 2: use the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI2. When setting to AVI, AVI2 is indicated. When the 3rd switch on the upper-right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram, the source of first master frequency command (Pr.02.00) will force setting to 2. This setting(Pr.02.00) can’t be changed till the 3rd switch is set to be OFF. ON 1 2 3 When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05 for details. The first /second frequency/operation command is enabled/disabled by Multi Function Input Terminals. Please refer to Pr.04.05 ~ 04.08. 02.01 Source of First Operation Command Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Digital keypad (Digital keypad is optional) 1 External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 2 External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 3 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 4 RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 5 CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.) When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05/Pr.04.04 for details. 02.10 Combination of the First and Second Master Frequency Command Factory Setting: 0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-51 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings 02.02 0 First Master Frequency Command Only 1 First Master Frequency + Second Master Frequency 2 First Master Frequency - Second Master Frequency 0 STOP: ramp to stop Stop Method Factory Setting: 0 Settings E.F.: coast to stop 1 STOP: coast to stop E.F.: coast to stop 2 STOP: ramp to stop E.F.: ramp to stop 3 STOP: coast to stop E.F.: ramp to stop nd When the 2 switch on the upper-right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following diagram, the motor stop method (Pr.02.02) will force setting to 1. This setting (Pr.02.02) can’t be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF. ON 1 2 3 The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop command or detects External Fault. Ramp: the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) according to the deceleration time and then stops. Coast: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command, and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill. The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and how frequently it is stopped. (1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The deceleration time has to be set accordingly. (2) If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select “coast to stop”. For example: blowers, punching machines, centrifuges and pumps. 4-52 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Frequency output frequency Frequency output frequency motor speed motor speed Time operation command stops according to decel eration time STOP RUN Time free run to stop operation command RUN STOP ramp to stop and free run to stop Frequency Frequency frequency output motor speed frequency output motor speed stops according to decel eration time operation command free run to stop operation command EF EF When Pr.02.02 is set to 0 or 1 When Pr.02.02 is set to 2 or 3 02.03 Unit: 1 PWM Carrier Frequency Selections 115V/230V/460V Series Power 0.25 to 15hp (0.2kW to 11kW) Setting Range 1 to 15 kHz Factory Setting 8 kHz This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-53 Chapter 4 Parameters| Carrier Frequency Acoustic Noise 1kHz Significant Electromagnetic Noise or leakage current Minimal Heat Dissipation Current Wave Minimal Minimal Significant Significant 8kHz 15kHz Minimal Significant From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and output current of the AC motor drive. It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT’s life. Example for 460V models: Assume the carrier frequency to be 15kHz, the ambient temperature is 50 degrees C with a single AC motor drive(mounting method A). If the output current exceeds 80% * rated current, the AC motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following chart. If output current is 100% * rated current, the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to 12kHz. Mounting method Method A Frame A Frame B & C 150mm 120mm Method B Frame A 4-54 50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm 120mm 150mm Frame B & C Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 25℃ with mounting method A 15℃ with mounting method B Rated Current (%) 100% 90% 35℃ with mounting method A 25℃ with mounting method B 80% 50℃ with mounting method A 40℃ with mounting method B 70% 60% 50% 40% 2kHz 14kHz 15kHz 6kHz 10kHz 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 115V/230V Series 25℃ with mounting method A 15℃ with mounting method B 100% Rated Current (%) Carrier Frequency 90% 80% 25℃ with mounting method B 70% 50℃ with mounting method A 40℃ with mounting method B 60% 50% 40% 2kHz 02.04 4kHz 6kHz 10kHz 14kHz 15kHz 8kHz 12kHz For 460V Series Carrier Frequency Motor Direction Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Forward/Reverse operation enabled 1 Reverse operation disabled 2 Forward operation disabled This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of rotation. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-55 Chapter 4 Parameters| 02.05 Line Start Lockout Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 1 Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 2 Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. 3 Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source Pr.02.01 is changed. This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command source is changed. Pr.02.05 Start lockout (Run when power is ON) Operation status when operation command source is changed 0 Disable (AC motor drive will run) Keep previous status 1 Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run) Keep previous status 2 Disable (AC motor drive will run) Change according to the new operation command source 3 Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run) Change according to the new operation command source When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON (MI1/MI2-DCM=closed), the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 after power is applied. <For terminals MI1 and MI2 only> 1. When Pr.02.05 is set to 0 or 2, AC motor drive will run immediately. 2. When Pr.02.05 is set to 1 or 3, AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation command is received after previous operation command is cancelled. 4-56 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| MI1-DCM (close) Pr.02.01=0 OFF ON RUN STO P RUN STOP output frequency Pr.02.05=0 or 2 Change operation command source Pr.02.01=1 or 2 This action will follow MI1/DCM or MI2/DCM status (ON is close/OFF is open) output frequency Pr.02.05=1 or 3 When the operation command source isn’t from the external terminals, independently from whether the AC motor drive runs or stops, the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 if the two conditions below are both met. 1. When operation command source is changed to external terminal (Pr.02.01=1 or 2) 2. The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different. And the operation of the AC motor drive will be: 1. When setting 0 or 1, the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status. 2. When setting 2 or 3, the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status. MI1-DCM (close) power is applied output frequency Pr.02.05=0 or 1 output frequency Pr.02.05=2 or 3 ON OFF OFF ON ON it will run it won't run when power is applied It needs to received a run command after previous command is cancelled The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-57 Chapter 4 Parameters| 02.06 Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Decelerate to 0Hz 1 Coast to stop and display “AErr” 2 Continue operation by the last frequency command This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost. When set to 1, it will display warning message “AErr” on the keypad in case of loss of ACI signal and execute the setting. When ACI signal is recovered, the warning message will stop blinking. Please press “RESET” key to clear it. 02.07 Up/Down Mode Factory Setting: 0 Settings 02.08 By digital keypad up/down keys mode 1 Based on Accel/Decel Time acc. to Pr.01.09 to 01.12 2 Constant speed (acc. to Pr. 02.08) 3 Pulse input unit (acc. to Pr. 02.08) Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with Constant Speed Settings 0 Unit: 0.01 0.01~10.00 Hz/2ms Factory Setting: 0.01 These parameters determine the increase/decrease of the master frequency when operated via the Multi-function Inputs when Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 are set to 10 (Up command) or 11 (Down command). When Pr.02.07 is set to 0: increase/decrease the frequency by using UP/DOWN key. It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running. 600Hz 50.0Hz 9.0Hz 0 4-58 4.34 s 3.28 s 3.68 s t (sec) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| When Pr.02.07 is set to 1: increase/decrease the frequency by acceleration/deceleration settings. It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running. When Pr.02.07 is set to 2: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08. When Pr.02.07 is set to 3: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08 (unit: pulse input). 02.11 Keypad Frequency Command Settings Factory Setting: 60.00 This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command. 02.12 Communication Frequency Command Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 60.00 This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency command. 02.13 The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency Command Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Save Keypad & Communication Frequency 1 Save Keypad Frequency only 2 Save Communication Frequency only This parameter is used to save keypad or RS-485 frequency command. 02.14 Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485/USB) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 02.15 By Current Freq Command 1 By Zero Freq Command 2 By Frequency Display at Stop Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485/USB) Settings 0 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 60.00 These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop: When setting Pr.02.14 to 0: the initial frequency will be current frequency. When setting Pr.02.14 to 1: the initial frequency will be 0. When setting Pr.02.14 to 2: the initial frequency will be Pr.02.15. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-59 Chapter 4 Parameters| 02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter. Display Value Bit 1 Bit0=1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00). 2 Bit1=1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09). 4 Bit2=1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi-input function 8 Bit3=1 02.17 Function Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Display the Operation Command Source Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## You can read the operation source by this parameter. Display Value Bit 1 Bit0=1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad 2 Bit1=1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication 4 Bit2=1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal 8 Bit3=1 Operation Command Source by Multi-input function 16 Bit4=1 4-60 Function Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 3: Output Function Parameters 03.00 Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1) 03.01 Multi-function Output Terminal MO1 Factory Setting: 8 Factory Setting: 1 Settings Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”. Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting. 2 3 Zero Speed 4 Over-Torque Detection 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Baseblock (B.B.) Indication Active when Command Frequency is lower than the Minimum Output Frequency. Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03 ~ Pr.06.05) Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-function input (setting 09). Low-Voltage Indication Active when low voltage(Lv) is detected. Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal. Fault Indication Desired Frequency 1 Attained Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3, HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF). Active when the desired frequency 1(Pr.03.02) is attained. Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value. Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value. Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-61 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Function Over Current Stall 13 supervision 14 Description Active when the Over Current Stall function operating Heat Sink Overheat When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off Warning the drive. When it is higher than 85oC (185oF), it will be ON. 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV Zero Speed Output 19 Signal Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal (Refer to Pr.10.12 and Pr.13.) Active when the drive is standby or stop Communication Warning 20 (FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, Active when there is a Communication Warning SAvE) 21 22 Brake Control (Desired Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03.11. Deactivated when Frequency Attained) output frequency ≤Pr.03.12 after STOP command. Drive Ready Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected. Desired Frequency 2 23 Attained Active when the desired frequency 1(Pr.03.14) is attained. 03.02 Desired Frequency 1 Attained 03.14 Desired Frequency 2 Attained Settings 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Unit: 0.01 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained (Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01=09), then the output will be activated when the programmed frequency is attained. 4-62 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Frequency master frequency detection 4Hz range 2Hz detection range detection -2Hz range desired frequency waiting time 03.02/03.14 for frequency run/stop setting 2 master freq. attained (output signal) setting 9/23 desired freq. attained setting 03 zero speed indication setting 19 zero speed indication DC braking tim during stop OFF OFF Time OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON output timing chart of multiple function terminals when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication 03.03 Analog Output Signal (AFM) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 1 Analog Current Meter (0 to 250% of rated AC motor drive current) Analog Output Gain Settings Analog Frequency Meter (0 to Maximum Output Frequency) This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0~+10VDC (ACM is common). 03.04 0 1 to 200% Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 100 This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM. When Pr.03.03 is set to 0, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output frequency of the AC motor drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) of the AC motor drive corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output. Similarly, if Pr.03.03 is set to 1, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output current of the AC drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, then 2.5 times the rated current corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output. NOTE Any type of voltmeter can be used. If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V, Pr. 03.04 should be set using the following formula: Pr. 03.04 = ((meter full scale voltage)/10) x 100% Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-63 Chapter 4 Parameters| For Example: When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts, adjust Pr.03.04 to 50%. If Pr.03.03 is set to 0, then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency. 03.05 Terminal Count Value Settings Unit: 1 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. To increase the internal counter, one of Pr.04.05 to 04.08 should be set to 12. Upon completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated. (Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01 set to 10). When the display shows c555, the drive has counted 555 times. If display shows c555•, it means that real counter value is between 5,550 and 5,559. 03.06 Preliminary Count Value Settings Unit: 1 0 to 9999 Factory Setting: 0 When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01 set to 11 (Preliminary Count Value Setting). This multi-function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal Count Value Attained. The timing diagram: 2msec Display (Pr.00.04=1) TRG Counter Trigger 2msec Preliminary Count Value (Pr. 03.00~Pr. 03.01=11) The width of trigger signal should not be less than 2ms(<250 Hz) Ex:03.05=5,03.06=3 Terminal Count Value (Pr. 03.00~Pr. 03.01=10) 03.07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Terminal count value attained, no EF display 1 Terminal count value attained, EF active If this parameter is set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will treat it as a fault. The drive will stop and show the “EF” message on the display. 4-64 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 03.08 Fan Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Fan always ON 1 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF 2 Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive stops 3 Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan. 03.09 The Digital Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## Bit0=1: RLY used by PLC Bit1=1: MO1 used by PLC Bit2=1: MO2/RA2 used by PLC Bit3=1: MO3/RA3 used by PLC Bit4=1: MO4/RA4 used by PLC Bit5=1: MO5/RA5 used by PLC Bit6=1: MO6/RA6 used by PLC Bit7=1: MO7/RA7 used by PLC The equivalent 8-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each digital output. The value that Pr.03.09 displays is the result after converting 8-bit binary into decimal value. For standard AC motor drive, it only has 2-bit (bit0 and bit1). When extension card is installed, the number of the digital output terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-65 Chapter 4 Parameters| 0=not used 1=Used by PLC Weights Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Relay 1 MO1 MO2/RA2 MO3/RA3 MO4/RA4 MO5/RA5 MO6/RA6 MO7/RA7 For example: when Pr.03.09 is set to 3 (decimal) = 00000011 (binary) that indicates Relay1 and MO1 are used by PLC. (Pr.03.09= 20+21=3) 0=not used 1=Used by PLC Weights Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Relay 1 MO1 MO2/RA2 MO3/RA3 MO4/RA4 MO5/RA5 MO6/RA6 MO7/RA7 03.10 The Analog Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## Bit0=1: AFM used by PLC Bit1=1: AO1 used by PLC Bit2=1: AO2 used by PLC The equivalent 1-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each analog output. The value that Pr.03.10 displays is the result after converting 1-bit binary into decimal value. Weights Bit 2 1 0 0=not used 1=Used by PLC AFM AO1 (optional) AO2 (optional) For Example: If Pr.03.10 displays 1, it means that AFM is used by PLC. 4-66 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 03.11 Brake Release Frequency Settings 03.12 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 Brake Engage Frequency Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz 0.00 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals (Relay or MO1) when Pr.03.00~03.01 is set to 21. Refer to the following example for details. Example: 1. Case 1: Pr.03.12 ≥ Pr.03.11 2. Case 2: Pr.03.12 ≤ Pr.03.11 Frequency Output Case 1: Pr.03.12 Pr. 03.11 Case 2: Pr.03.12 Time Run/Stop Case 1: MO1=21 Case 2: MO1=21 Note: MO1: setting value of Pr.03.01 03.13 Display the Status of Multi-function Output Terminals Settings Read Only Factory setting: ## Bit0: RLY Status Bit1: MO1 Status Bit2: MO2/RA2 Status Bit3: MO3/RA3 Status Bit4: MO4/RA4 Status Bit5: MO5/RA5 Status Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-67 Chapter 4 Parameters| Bit6: MO6/RA6 Status Bit7: MO7/RA7 Status For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function output terminals are falling-edge triggered and Pr.03.13 will display 3 (11) for no action. 0=Active 1=Off Relay 1 Weights Bit 1 0 MO1 For Example: If Pr.03.13 displays 2, it means Relay 1 is active. The display value 2 =bit 1 X 21 When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function output terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function output terminals is shown as follows. 0=Active 1=Off Weights Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Relay 1 MO1 MO2/RA2 MO3/RA3 MO4/RA4 MO5/RA5 MO6/RA6 MO7/RA7 4-68 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 4: Input Function Parameters 04.00 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Settings 04.01 Unit: 0. 1 0.0 to 100.0% Factory Setting: 0.0 Keypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity Factory Setting: 0 Settings 04.02 Positive Bias 1 Negative Bias Keypad Potentiometer Gain Settings 04.03 0 Unit: 0.1 0.1 to 200.0% Factory Setting: 100.0 Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion Enable/Disable Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 No Negative Bias Command 1 Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled Example 1: Standard application This is the most used setting. The user only needs to set Pr.02.00 to 04. The frequency command comes from keypad potentiometer. 60Hz Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command 30Hz 0Hz 0V 5V 10V Example 2: Use of bias This example shows the influence of changing the bias. When the input is 0V the output frequency is 10 Hz. At mid-point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz. Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached, any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency. (To use the full potentiometer range, please refer to Example 3.) The value of external input voltage/current 08.33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10-60Hz. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-69 Chapter 4 Parameters| Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =16.7%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command 60Hz 40Hz 10Hz Bias Adjustment 0Hz 0V Gain:100% 5V 10V Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=16.7% Example 3: Use of bias and gain for use of full range This example also shows a popular method. The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as desired. In addition to signals of 0 to 10V, the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V, or any value under 10V. Regarding the setting, please refer to the following examples. Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =20.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =83.3%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command 60Hz Bias 10Hz Adjustment 0Hz0V -2V XV Gain:(10V/(10V+2V))*100%=83.3% 5V 10V Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=20.0% Example 4: Use of 0-5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts. Instead of adjusting gain as example below, you can set Pr. 01.00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results. Gain adjustment 60Hz 30Hz Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =0.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200% 0Hz 0V 4-70 5V 10V Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Example 5: Use of negative bias in noisy environment In this example, a 1V negative bias is used. In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin (1V in this example). Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command 60Hz 54Hz 0Hz Negative 0V 1V bias 6Hz Gain:100% 10V Bias adjustment:((6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0% Example 6: Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full potentiometer range In this example, a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin. Also a potentiometer frequency gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached. 60Hz 0Hz Negative 0V 1V bias 6.6Hz Bias adjustment Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias Pr.04.02 =111%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command Gain:(10V/9V)*100%=111% 10V Bias adjustment:((6.6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0% Example 7: Use of 0-10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction In this example, the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction. The motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid-point of its scale. Using the settings in this example disables the external FWD and REV controls. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-71 Chapter 4 Parameters| 60Hz 30Hz FWD 0V 0Hz REV 5V 10V 30Hz 60Hz Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =50.0%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200% Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=200% Example 8: Use negative slope In this example, the use of negative slope is shown. Negative slopes are used in applications for control of pressure, temperature or flow. The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large signal (10V) at high pressure or flow. With negative slope settings, the AC motor drive will slow stop the motor. With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction (reverse). This can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor. 60Hz 0Hz Gain:(10V/10V)*100%=100% 0V 04.11 10V 04.12 Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 0.0 to 100.0% Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 20.0mA 0.0 to 100.0% Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 Factory Setting: 4.0 Minimum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Settings Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Minimum ACI Current Settings 04.16 0.0 to 100.0% Maximum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Settings 04.15 Factory Setting: 0.0 Maximum AVI Voltage Settings 04.14 Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 10.0V Minimum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr.01.00) Settings 04.13 Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=100% Minimum AVI Voltage Settings 4-72 Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq. Potentiometer Pr.04.00 =100%--Bias adjustment Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled negative slope Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 04.17 Maximum ACI Current Settings 04.18 Factory Setting: 20.0 Maximum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00) Settings 04.19 Unit: 0.01 0.0 to 20.0mA 0.0 to 100.0% Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 ACI Terminal Mode Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 04.20 Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 0.0 0.0 to 100.0% Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 10.0V Factory Setting: 10.0 Maximum AVI2 Frequency (percentage of Pr.1-00) Settings AVI2 Maximum AVI2 Voltage Settings 04.23 1 Minimum AVI2 Frequency (percentage of Pr.1-00) Settings 04.22 ACI Minimum AVI2 Voltage Settings 04.21 0 0.0 to 100.0% Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 Please note the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive. Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog current signal (ACI) (Pr.04.19 should be set to 0) and AVI for analog voltage signal (AVI2) (Pr.04.19 should be set to 1). The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values. The min and max frequencies are based on Pr.01.00 (during open-loop control) as shown in the following. 01.00 04.14 04.18 04.12 04.16 04.21 04.11 04.15 04.20 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 04.17 04.22 analog input 4-73 Chapter 4 Parameters| 01.00=60.00 Hz 04.14=70 AVI 04.18=50 ACI 04.12=30 analog input 04.16=0 04.13=10V 04.17=20mA 04.11=0V 04.15=4mA 04.04 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI1, MI2) 2-wire/ 3-wire Operation Control Modes Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP 1 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP 2 3-wire Operation There are three different types of control modes: 04.04 0 External Terminal 2-wire FWD/STOP MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":FWD) FWD /STOP REV/STOP MI2:("OPEN": STOP) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM VFD-E REV / STOP 1 2-wire RUN/STOP FWD/ REV FWD/REV RUN / STOP 4-74 MI1:("OPEN":STOP) ("CLOSE":RUN) MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM VFD-E Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 04.04 External Terminal STOP RUN MI1 : ("CLOSE":RUN) MI3:("OPEN":STOP) 2 3-wire REV/FWD 04.05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3) 04.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4) 04.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5) 04.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6) MI2:("OPEN": FWD) ("CLOSE": REV) DCM VFD-E Factory Setting: 1 Factory Setting: 2 Factory Setting: 3 Factory Setting: 4 Settings 0 1 Function No Function Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they have no effect on operation. Multi-Step Speed Command 1 These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table. 2 Multi-Step Speed Command 2 NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output 3 Multi-Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive’s internal PLC Command 3 function. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for 4 Multi-Step Speed application. Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-75 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Function 6 Accel/Decel Inhibit Accel/Decel Time 7 Selection Command Description When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed. Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12). See explanation at the end of this table. Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input 8 Jog Operation Control Terminals MI3 ∼ MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) for Jog control. NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15) Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for external Base Block control. 9 External Base NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor Block drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When (Refer to Pr. 08.06) base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency. 10 UP: Increase Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active. When both inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency 11 DOWN: Decrease increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This Master Frequency function is also called “motor potentiometer”. Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi-function Input 12 Counter Trigger Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to increment the AC drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is incremented by 1. 13 Counter Reset 14 External Fault When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06. Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi-function Input Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to be External Fault (E.F.) inputs. 4-76 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings 15 Function Description PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be disabled disabled. AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of 16 Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC motor drive will restart from 0Hz. 17 Parameter lock When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and enable write parameters is disabled. Operation Command 18 Selection (Pr.02.01 When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the terminals) priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20. Command Selection (Pr 02.01 21 OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the Keypad) priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20. Operation ON: Operation command via Communication Selection (Pr 02.01 OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting setting/ When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the Communication) priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20. Forward/Reverse Source of second 22 ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad setting/Digital Command 20 OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting setting/external Operation 19 ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals frequency command enabled This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If “Pr.02.04=0”) Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer to Pr.02.00 and 02.09. ON: 2nd Frequency command source OFF: 1st Frequency command source Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-77 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Function Description ON: Run PLC Program OFF: Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is 23 Run/Stop PLC enabled, it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC Program (PLC1) program. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the (NOT for VFD*E*C PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be models) stopped by Pr.02.02. When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status. Quick Stop 23 (ONLY for It is only valid when Pr.02.01 is set to 5 in VFD*E*C models. VFD*E*C models) When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is Download/Execute/ Monitor PLC 24 Program (PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) enabled, it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can download/execute/monitor PLC. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02. When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status. 25 Simple position This function should be used with Pr.01.20~Pr.01.25 for simple function position. Refer to Pr.01.25 for details. The OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with 26 OOB (Out of PLC for washing machine. When this setting is enabled, it will get Balance Detection) Δθ value from the settings of Pr.08.21 and Pr.08.22. PLC or host controller will decide the motor speed by this t Δθ value (Pr.08.23) 27 Motor selection (bit When this setting is enabled, it can be used for motor selection 0) (Pr. 01.01~01.06, 01.26~01.43, 07.18~07.38, 07.00~07.06). For example: MI1=27, MI2=28 When MI1 and MI2 are OFF, it selects motor 0. 28 Motor selection (bit When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF, it selects motor 1. 1) When MI1 is OFF and MI2 is ON, it selects motor 2. When MI1 and MI2 are ON, it selects motor 3. 4-78 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Accel/Decel Time Selection Frequency Master Freq. Acceleration Delceleration Decel time 1 Accel time 2 01.11 01.10 Decel time 2 01.12 Accel time 1 01.09 RUN/STOP PU External terminal communication Accel/Decel time 1 & 2 Multi-function Input Terminals Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08(MI3 to MI6) 1 1 2 OFF 2 Time ON OFF ON Accel/Decel Time and Multi-function Input Terminals Multi-Step Speed 05.07 Frequency 05.06 05.08 05.05 05.09 05.04 05.10 05.03 05.11 05.02 05.12 05.01 JOG Freq. 05.13 05.00 01.15 05.14 Master Speed 04.05~04.08 Multi-function terminals Run/Stop PU/external terminals /communication 1st speed ( MI3 to MI6 1) 2nd speed ( MI3 to MI6 2) 3rd speed ( MI3 to MI6 3) 4th speed ( MI3 to MI6 4) Jog Freq. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF Multi-speed via External Terminals Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-79 Chapter 4 Parameters| 04.09 MI6=4 MI5=3 MI4=2 MI3=1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1st speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2nd speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3rd speed 4th speed OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 5th speed OFF ON OFF ON 6th speed OFF ON ON OFF 7th speed OFF ON ON ON 8th speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9th speed 10th speed ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 11th speed ON OFF ON ON 12th speed ON ON OFF OFF 13th speed ON ON OFF ON 14th speed 15th speed ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Multi-function Input Contact Selection Settings Unit: 1 0 to 4095 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter can be used to set the status of multi-function terminals (MI1~MI6 (N.O./N.C.) for standard AC motor drive). The MI1~MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal (2/3wire). Weights Bit 5 4 3 2 1 0 0=N.O 1=N.C MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 The Setting method: It needs to convert binary number (6-bit) to decimal number for input. For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be N.C. and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be N.O. The setting value Pr.04.09 should be bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. 4-80 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 0=N.O 1=N.C Weights Bit 1 1 0 1 0 0 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 The setting value 5 4 2 = bit5x2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2 5 4 2 = 1x2 +1x2 +1x2 =32+16+4 =52 Setting 04.09 NOTE: 14 13 12 2 =16384 2 =8192 9 2 =512 4 2 =16 3 7 2 =4 10 2 =2048 2 =1024 6 2 =128 2 2 =8 11 2 =4096 8 2 =256 5 2 =64 1 2 =2 2 =32 0 2 =1 When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is shown as follows. Weights Bit 0=N.O 1=N.C 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 04.10 Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time Settings 1 to 20 Unit: 2ms Factory Setting: 1 This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4 msec, etc. The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to malfunction. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-81 Chapter 4 Parameters| 04.24 The Digital Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Settings Display Read Only Factory setting: ## Bit0=1: MI1 used by PLC Bit1=1: MI2 used by PLC Bit2=1: MI3 used by PLC Bit3=1: MI4 used by PLC Bit4=1: MI5 used by PLC Bit5=1: MI6 used by PLC Bit6=1: MI7 used by PLC Bit7=1: MI8 used by PLC Bit8=1: MI9 used by PLC Bit9=1: MI10 used by PLC Bit10=1: MI11 used by PLC Bit11=1: MI12 used by PLC For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the equivalent 6-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each digital input. The value for Pr.04.24 to display is the result after converting 6-bit binary into decimal value. Weights Bit 5 4 3 2 1 0 0=not used 1=used by PLC MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 For example: when Pr.04.24 is set to 52 (decimal) = 110100 (binary) that indicates MI3, MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC. Weights Bit 1 1 0 1 0 0 0=OFF 1=ON MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 4-82 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| When extension card is installed, the number of the digital input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown as follows. Weights Bit 0=not used 1=Used by PLC 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 04.25 The Analog Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Settings Read Only Display Bit0=1: AVI used by PLC Factory setting: ## Bit1=1: ACI/AVI2 used by PLC Bit2=1: AI1 used by PLC Bit3=1: AI2 used by PLC The equivalent 2-bit is used to display the status(used or not used) of each analog input. The value for Pr.04.25 to display is the result after converting 2-bit binary into decimal value. Weights 0=not used 1=used by PLC Bit 3 2 1 0 AVI ACI/AVI2 AI1 (optional) AI2 (optional) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-83 Chapter 4 Parameters| 04.26 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal Settings Read Only Display Bit0: MI1 Status Factory setting: ## Bit1: MI2 Status Bit2: MI3 Status Bit3: MI4 Status Bit4: MI5 Status Bit5: MI6 Status Bit6: MI7 Status Bit7: MI8 Status Bit8: MI9 Status Bit9: MI10 Status Bit10: MI11 Status Bit11: MI12 Status The multi-function input terminals are falling-edge triggered. For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr.04.26 will display 63 (111111) for no action. Weights Bit 5 4 3 2 1 0 0=Active 1=off MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 For Example: If Pr.04.26 displays 52, it means MI1, MI2 and MI4 are active. The display value 52= 32+16+4 =1 X 25+ 1X 24 + 1X 22 = bit 6 X 25+ bit 5 X 24 + bit 3 X 22 4-84 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Weights Bit 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 Chapter 4 Parameters| 0=Active 1=Off MI1 0 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is shown as follows. Weights Bit 0=Active 1=Off 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 04.27 Internal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection Settings 0 to 4095 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal. You can activate internal terminals by Pr.04.28. A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and external terminal at the same time. For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-85 Chapter 4 Parameters| Weights Bit 5 4 3 2 1 0=external terminal 1=internal terminal MI1 0 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input. For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be external terminals. The setting value should be bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. Weights 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 0 0=external terminal 1=internal terminal MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is shown as follows. Weights Bit 0=external terminal 1=internal terminal 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 04.28 Internal Terminal Status Settings 4-86 0 to 4095 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad, communication or PLC. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function input terminals are MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following. Weights Bit 5 4 3 2 1 0=set internal terminal to be OFF 1= set internal terminal to be ON MI1 0 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 For example, if setting MI3, MI5 and MI6 to be ON, Pr.04.28 should be set to bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following. Weights 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 0 0=OFF 1=ON MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is shown as follows. Weights Bit 0=set internal terminal to be OFF 1=set internal terminal to be ON 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 MI9 MI10 MI11 MI12 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-87 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 5: Multi-step Speeds Parameters 05.00 1st Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.01 2nd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.02 3rd Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.03 4th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.04 5th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.05 6th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.06 7th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.07 8th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.08 9th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.09 10th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.10 11th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.11 12th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.12 13th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.13 14th Step Speed Frequency Unit: 0.01 05.14 15th Step Speed Frequency Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to Pr.04.05 to 04.08) are used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds. The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.05.00 to 05.14 as shown in the following. 4-88 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 05.07 Frequency 05.06 05.08 05.05 05.09 05.04 05.10 05.03 05.11 05.02 05.12 05.01 JOG Freq. 01.15 05.13 05.00 05.14 Master Speed 04.05~04.08 Multi-function terminals Run/Stop PU/external terminals /communication 1st speed ( MI3 to MI6 1) 2nd speed ( MI3 to MI6 2) 3rd speed ( MI3 to MI6 3) 4th speed ( MI3 to MI6 4) Jog Freq. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Multi-speed via External Terminals MI6=4 MI5=3 MI4=2 MI3=1 Master frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF 1st speed OFF OFF OFF ON 2nd speed OFF OFF ON OFF 3rd speed 4th speed OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 5th speed OFF ON OFF ON 6th speed OFF ON ON OFF 7th speed OFF ON ON ON 8th speed ON OFF OFF OFF 9th speed 10th speed ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 11th speed ON OFF ON ON 12th speed ON ON OFF OFF 13th speed ON ON OFF ON 14th speed 15th speed ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-89 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 6: Protection Parameters 06.00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention Unit: 0.1 Settings 115V/230V series 330.0 to 410.0V Factory Setting: 390.0 460V series 660.0 to 820.0V 0 Disable Over-voltage Stall Prevention (with brake unit or brake resistor) Factory Setting: 780.0 During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again. Over-Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled (Pr.06.00=0) when a brake unit or brake resistor is used. NOTE With moderate inertia load, over-voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time will be equal to the setting of deceleration time. The AC drive will automatically extend the deceleration time with high inertia loads. If the deceleration time is critical for the application, a brake resistor or brake unit should be used. high voltage at DC side over-voltage detection level time output frequency Frequency Held Deceleration characteristic when Over-Voltage Stall Prevention enabled time previous deceleration time actual time to decelerate to stop when over-voltage stall prevention is enabled 4-90 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 06.01 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration Settings Unit: 1 20 to 250% Factory Setting: 170 0: disable A setting of 100% is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive. During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr.06.01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value. 06.01 Over-Current Detection Level output current setting frequency Over-Current Stall prevention during Acceleration, frequency held Output Frequency time previous acceleration time actual acceleration time when over-current stall prevention is enabled 06.02 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation Settings 20 to 250% Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 170 0: disable If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06.02 when the drive is operating, the drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06.02, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set frequency command value. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-91 Chapter 4 Parameters| Over-Current Detection Level 06.02 Over-Current Stall Prevention during Operation, output frequency decrease Output Current Output Frequency over-current stall prevention during operation 06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Over-Torque detection disabled. 1 Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation. After over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 2 Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation. After over-torque is detected, stop running. 3 Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After overtorque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs. 4 Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After overtorque is detected, stop running. This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2) is detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr.06.04) longer than the setting of Pr.06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time, the warning message “OL2” is displayed. If a Multi-functional Output Terminal is set to over-torque detection (Pr.03.00~03.01=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03.00~03.01 for details. 06.04 Over-Torque Detection Level (OL2) Settings Factory Setting: 150 This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive. 06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time (OL2) Settings 4-92 Unit: 1 10 to 200% 0.1 to 60.0 sec Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.1 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| This parameter sets the time for how long over-torque must be detected before “OL2” is displayed. 06.06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1) Factory Setting: 2 Settings Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan) 1 Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling) 2 Operation disabled 100 80 60 40 20 25 50 100 rated frequency of the motor % 150 rated current of the motor% This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating. rated current of the motor% 0 100 80 60 40 20 25 Standard motor (self-cooled by fan) 06.07 150 Special Motor (forced external cooling) Electronic Thermal Characteristic Settings 50 100 rated frequency of the motor % Unit: 1 30 to 600 sec Factory Setting: 60 The parameter determines the time required for activating the I2t electronic thermal protection function. The graph below shows I2t curves for 150% output power for 1 minute. Operation time (seconds) 350 300 50Hz or more 10Hz 250 5Hz 200 150 100 50 Load 0 50 100 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 150 200 250 factor (%) 4-93 Chapter 4 Parameters| 06.08 Present Fault Record 06.09 Second Most Recent Fault Record 06.10 Third Most Recent Fault Record 06.11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 06.12 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record Factory Setting: 0 Readings 4-94 0 No fault 1 Over-current (oc) 2 Over-voltage (ov) 3 IGBT Overheat (oH1) 4 Power Board Overheat (oH2) 5 Overload(oL) 6 Overload (oL1) 7 Motor Overload (oL2) 8 External Fault (EF) 9 Hardware protection failure (HPF) 10 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA) 11 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd) 12 Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn) 13 Reserved 14 Phase-loss (PHL) 15 Reserved 16 Auto accel/decel failure (CFA) 17 Software/password protection (codE) 18 Power Board CPU WRITE Failure (cF1.0) 19 Power Board CPU READ Failure (cF2.0) 20 CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1) 21 OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2) 22 GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3) 23 OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4) 24 U-phase error (cF3.0) 25 V-phase error (cF3.1) 26 W-phase error (cF3.2) 27 DCBUS error (cF3.3) 28 IGBT Overheat (cF3.4) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 29 Power Board Overheat (cF3.5) 30 Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1) 31 Contrsol Board CPU READ failure (cF2.1) 32 ACI signal error (AErr) 33 Reserved 34 Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1) 35-39 Reserved 40 Communication time-out error of control board and power board (CP10) In Pr.06.08 to Pr.06.12 the five most recent faults that occurred, are stored. After removing the cause of the fault, use the reset command to reset the drive. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-95 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 7: Motor Parameters 07.00 Motor Rated Current (Motor 0) Settings Unit: 1 30% FLA to 120% FLA Factory Setting: FLA Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter: (Motor Current / AC Drive Current) x 100% with Motor Current=Motor rated current in A on type shield AC Drive Current=Rated current of AC drive in A (see Pr.00.01) Pr.07.00 and Pr.07.01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control mode (Pr.00.10 = 1). They also must be set if the "Electronic Thermal Overload Relay" (Pr.06.06) or "Slip Compensation"(Pr.07-03) functions are selected. Pr.07.00 must be greater than Pr.07.01. 07.01 Motor No-load Current (Motor 0) Settings Unit: 1 0% FLA to 90% FLA Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100%. The setting of the Motor no-load current will affect the slip compensation. The setting value must be less than Pr.07.00 (Motor Rated Current). 07.02 Torque Compensation (Motor 0) Settings Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 0.0 This parameter may be set so that the AC drive will increase its voltage output to obtain a higher torque. Only to be used for V/f control mode. Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor. 07.03 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0) Settings 0.00 to 10.00 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 While driving an asynchronous motor, increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an increase in slip and decrease in speed. This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by increasing the output frequency. When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than the motor no-load current (Pr.07.01), the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to this parameter. 4-96 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 07.04 Motor Parameters Auto Tuning Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Disable 1 Auto Tuning R1 (motor doesn’t run) 2 Auto Tuning R1 + No-load Test (with running motor) Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2. When set to 1, it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr.07.01 must be input manually. When set to 2, the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr.07.01 and Pr.07.05 will be set automatically. The steps for AUTO-Tuning are: 1. Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct. 2. Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not connected to any belt or gear motor. 3. Fill in Pr.01.01, Pr.01.02, Pr.07.00, Pr.07.04 and Pr.07.06 with correct values. 4. After Pr.07.04 is set to 2, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after receiving a ”RUN” command. (Note: The motor will run!). The total auto tune time will be 15 seconds + Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.10. Higher power drives need longer Accel/Decel time (factory setting is recommended). After executing Auto-tune, Pr.07.04 is set to 0. 5. After executing, please check if there are values filled in Pr.07.01 and Pr.07.05. If not, please press RUN key after setting Pr.07.04 again. 6. Then you can set Pr.00.10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application requirement. NOTE 1. In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel. 2. It is not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of the AC motor drive. 07.05 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 0) Settings 0 to 65535 mΩ Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 4-97 Chapter 4 Parameters| The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter. The user may also set this parameter without using Pr.07.04. 07.06 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0) Settings Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 20.00Hz Factory Setting: 3.00 Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the following equation to calculate the rated slip. Rated Slip (Hz) = Fbase (Pr.01.01 base frequency) – (rated rpm x motor pole 120) 07.07 Slip Compensation Limit Settings Unit: 1 0 to 250% Factory Setting: 200 This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency (the percentage of Pr.07.06). Example: when Pr.07.06=5Hz and Pr.07.07=150%, the upper limit of the compensation frequency is 7.5Hz. Therefore, for a 50Hz motor, the max. output is 57.5Hz. 07.08 Torque Compensation Time Constant Settings 07.09 Unit: 0.01 0.01 ~10.00 sec Factory Setting: 0.10 Slip Compensation Time Constant Settings Unit: 0.01 0.05 ~10.00 sec Factory Setting: 0.20 Setting Pr.07.08 and Pr.07.09 changes the response time for the compensations. Too long time constants give slow response; too short values can give unstable operation. 07.10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.) Settings 07.11 Factory Setting: 0 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day) Settings Unit: 1 0~1439 Unit: 1 0 ~65535 Factory Setting: 0 Pr.07.10 and Pr.07.11 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded. 07.12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Settings 07.14 4-98 0 Disable 1 Enable Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level Unit: 0.1 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings 0.1~10.0V Factory Setting: 2.4 When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time, the cooling function of the motor fan will be lower. To prevent overheating, it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive’s corresponding control terminals. When the source of first/second frequency command is set to AVI (02.00=1/02.09=1), it will disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection (i.e. Pr.07.12 cannot be set to 1). If temperature exceeds the setting level, motor will be coast to stop and is displayed. When the temperature decreases below the level of (Pr.07.15-Pr.07.16) and stops blinking, you can press RESET key to clear the fault. Pr.07.14 (overheat protection level) must exceed Pr.07.15 (overheat warning level). The PTC uses the AVI-input and is connected via resistor-divider as shown below. 1. The voltage between +10V to ACM: lies within 10.4V~11.2V. 2. The impedance for AVI is around 47kΩ. 3. Recommended value for resistor-divider R1 is 1~20kΩ. 4. Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for PTC. VFD-E +10V resistor-divider R1 AVI 47kΩ PTC ACM internal circuit Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-99 Chapter 4 Parameters| Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level. 1. Protection level Pr.07.14= V+10 * (RPTC1//47K) / [R1+( RPTC1//47K)] 2. Warning level Pr.07.16= V+10 * (RPTC2//47K) / [R1+( RPTC2//47K)] 3. Definition: V+10: voltage between +10V-ACM, Range 10.4~11.2VDC RPTC1: motor PTC overheat protection level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.14, RPTC2: motor PTC overheat warning level. Corresponding voltage level set in Pr.07.15, 47kΩ: is AVI input impedance, R1: resistor-divider (recommended value: 1~20kΩ) Take the standard PTC thermistor as example: if protection level is 1330Ω, the voltage between +10V-ACM is 10.5V and resistor-divider R1 is 4.4kΩ. Refer to following calculation for Pr.07.14 setting. 1330//47000=(1330*47000)/(1330+47000)=1293.4 10.5*1293.4/(4400+1293.4)=2.38(V) ≒2.4(V) Therefore, Pr.07.14 should be set to 2.4. resistor value ( Ω) 1330 550 Tr Tr-5℃ 07.15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level Settings 07.16 Unit: 0.1 0.1~10.0V Factory Setting: 1.2 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level Settings 07.17 temperature (℃) Tr+5℃ Unit: 0.1 0.1~5.0V Factory Setting: 0.6 Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat Factory Setting: 0 Settings 4-100 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep running Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level (Pr.07.15), the drive will act according to Pr.07.17 and display . If the temperature decreases below the result (Pr.07.15 minus Pr.07.16), the warning display will disappear. 07.13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection Settings 0~9999 (is 0-19998ms) Unit: 2 Factory Setting: 100 This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4 msec, etc. 07.18 Motor Rated Current (Motor 1) Settings 07.19 Motor No-load Current (Motor 1) Settings 07.20 0.00 to 10.00 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 2) Settings 07.30 0.0 to 10.0 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 2) Settings 07.29 0% FLA to 90% FLA Torque Compensation (Motor 2) Settings 07.28 30% FLA to 120% FLA Motor No-load Current (Motor 2) Settings 07.27 2 to 10 Motor Rated Current (Motor 2) Settings 07.26 0.00 to 20.00Hz Motor Pole Number (Motor 1) Settings 07.25 0 to 65535 mΩ Motor Rated Slip (Motor 1) Settings 07.24 0.00 to 10.00 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 1) Settings 07.23 0.0 to 10.0 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 1) Settings 07.22 0% FLA to 90% FLA Torque Compensation (Motor 1) Settings 07.21 30% FLA to 120% FLA 0 to 65535 mΩ Motor Rated Slip (Motor 2) Settings 0.00 to 20.00Hz Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: FLA Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 3.00 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 4 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: FLA Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 3.00 4-101 Chapter 4 Parameters| 07.31 Motor Pole Number (Motor 2) Settings 07.32 0.00 to 10.00 0 to 65535 mΩ 0.00 to 20.00Hz Motor Pole Number (Motor 3) Settings Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 10.0 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 3) Settings 07.38 Unit: 1 0% FLA to 90% FLA Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 3) Settings 07.37 Factory Setting: FLA Factory Setting: 0.0 Slip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 3) Settings 07.36 30% FLA to 120% FLA Torque Compensation (Motor 3) Settings 07.35 Unit: 1 Motor No-load Current (Motor 3) Settings 07.34 Factory Setting: 4 Motor Rated Current (Motor 3) Settings 07.33 Unit: 1 2 to 10 2 to 10 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 3.00 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 4 The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28. 4-102 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 8: Special Parameters 08.00 DC Brake Current Level Settings Unit: 1 0 to 100% Factory Setting: 0 This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00.01) is regarded as 100%. It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been achieved. 08.01 DC Brake Time during Start-up Settings Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency (Pr.01.05). 08.02 DC Brake Time during Stopping Settings Unit: 0.1 0.0 to 60.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. If stopping with DC Brake is desired, Pr.02.02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop. 08.03 Start-Point for DC Brake Settings Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. Output Frequency Start-Point for DC Braking Time during Stopping 01.05 08.03 Minimum Output Frequency DC Braking Time during Stopping Run/Stop ON Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 OFF 4-103 Chapter 4 Parameters| DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before setting it in motion. DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position. For high inertia loads, a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for fast decelerations. 08.04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Operation stops (coast to stop) after momentary power loss. 1 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value. 2 Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the minimum frequency. This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a momentary power loss. 08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Settings 0.1 to 5.0 sec Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 2.0 If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is then turned off (coast stop). The selected operation after power loss in Pr.08.04 is only executed when the maximum allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”. But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.08.04 is not executed. In that case it starts up normally. 08.06 Base Block Speed Search Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Disable 1 Speed search starts with last frequency command 2 Speed search starts with minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05) This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is enabled. 4-104 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Output frequency (H) Input B.B. signal Output voltage(V) Disable B.B. signal Stop output voltage Waiting time 08.07 A 08.08 Current Limit for Speed SearchSpeed Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run B.B. Fig 1:B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart (Speed Search Current Attains Speed Search Level) Output frequency (H) Input B.B. signal Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal Waiting time 08.07 08.08 Current Limit A for Speed SearchSpeed Speed Search Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run B.B. Fig 2: B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart (Speed Search Current doesn't Attain Speed Search Level) Input B.B. signal Output frequency (H) Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal 06.01 Over current A stall prevention A during acceleration Waiting time 08.07 Restart Synchronization speed detection Keep accelerating Time FWD Run B.B. Fig3: B.B. Speed Search with Minimum Output Frequency Upward Timing Chart Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-105 Chapter 4 Parameters| 08.07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB) Settings Unit: 0.1 0.1 to 5.0 sec Factory Setting: 0.5 When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait for a specified period of time (determined by Pr.08.07, called Base-Block Time) before resuming operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again. This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault (Pr.08.15). When using a PG card with PG (encoder), speed search will begin at the actual PG (encoder) feedback speed. 08.08 Current Limit for Speed Search Settings Unit: 1 30 to 200% Factory Setting: 150 Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.08.08. When the output current is less than the value of Pr.08.08, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss. Power Input 08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time Speed Search Output Frequency 08.04=1 Baseblock Time 08.06 Speed Synchronization Detection 08.05 Maximum Allowable Power 08.04=2 Baseblock Time 08.06 Output Voltage 08.09 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 08.10 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01 08.11 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 4-106 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 08.12 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit Unit: 0.01 08.13 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit Unit: 0.01 08.14 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit Settings Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 These parameters set the Skip Frequencies. It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output. These six parameters should be set as follows Pr.08.09 ≥ Pr.08.10 ≥ Pr.08.11 ≥ Pr.08.12 ≥ Pr.08.13 ≥ Pr.08.14. The frequency ranges may be overlapping. internal frequency command 08.15 08.10 08.11 08.12 08.13 08.14 0 setting frequency Auto Restart After Fault Settings 0 to 10 0 08.09 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 0 Disable Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times. Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred. When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 08.07 Base Block Time for Speed Search. 08.16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault Settings 0.1 to 6000 sec Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 60.0 4-107 Chapter 4 Parameters| This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr.08.15. For example: If Pr.08.15 is set to 10 and Pr.08.16 is set to 600s (10 min), and if there is no fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault, the auto reset times for restart after fault will be reset to 10. 08.17 Automatic Energy-saving Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Energy-saving operation disabled 1 Energy-saving operation enabled Output Voltage 100% 70% During auto-energy saving operation is the output voltage lowered as much as possible to keep the load. The output voltage is maximally lowered to 70% of the normal output voltage Output Frequency 08.18 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 AVR function enabled 1 AVR function disabled 2 AVR function disabled for deceleration 3 AVR function disabled for stop The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V/200VAC 50Hz/60Hz and the input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output. 4-108 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). For instance, if Pr.01.02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC. When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to 2 with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker. 08.19 Software Brake Level (the Action Level of the Brake resistor) Settings Unit: 0.1 115/230V series: 370.0 to 430.0V Factory Setting: 380.0 460V series: 740.0 to 860.0V Factory Setting: 760.0 This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. This parameter will be invalid for Frame A models (VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A and VFD022E23A/43A) without brake chopper for which BUE brake unit must be used. 08.20 Compensation Coefficient for Motor Instability Settings 0.0~5.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will make motor instable. By using this parameter, it will improve this situation greatly. The drift current zone of the high-power motors is usually in the low frequency area. It is recommended to set to more than 2.0. 08.21 OOB Sampling Time Settings 08.22 Settings 08.23 0.00 to 32 Factory Setting: 1.0 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 20 OOB Average Sampling Angle Settings 0.1 to 120.0 sec Number of OOB Sampling Times Unit: 0.1 Read-only Factory Setting: #.# The OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with PLC for washing machine. When multi-function input terminal is enabled (MI=26), it will get Δθ value from the settings of Pr.08.21 and Pr.08.22. PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t Δθ value (Pr.08.23). When Δθ value is large, it means unbalanced load. At this moment, it needs Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-109 Chapter 4 Parameters| to lower the freqeuency command by PLC or the host controller. On the other hand, it can be high-speed operation. 08.24 DEB Function Factory Setting: 0 Settings 08.25 Disable 1 Enable DEB Return Time Settings 0 Unit: 1 0~250 sec Factory Setting: 0 The DEB (Deceleration Energy Backup) function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method. When the power is on again, motor will run again after DEB return time. (for high-speed axis application) Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low voltage)/sudden heavy-load DC BUS voltage it doesn't need multi-function terminals The level for DEB return time (Lv=+30V+58V) The level for soft start relay to be ON (Lv+30) Lv level Soft start relay at power side DEB function is activated Output frequency Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for momentary power loss DEB return time 07-14 NOTE When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start at the power-on again. 4-110 Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| DC BUS voltage The level for DEB return time (Lv=+30V+58V) The level for soft start relay to be ON (Lv+30) Lv level Soft start relay at power side DEB function is activated Output frequency Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for momentary power loss DEB return time Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 07-14 4-111 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 9: Communication Parameters There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-45 near to the control terminals. The pins are defined below: 8 1 RS-485 (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Serial interface 1: Reserved 2: EV 3: GND 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 4: SG7: Reserved 8: Reserved The pins definition for VFD*E*C models, please refer to chapter E.1.2. Each VFD-E AC motor drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09.00. The RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address. 09.00 Communication Address Settings 1 to 254 Factory Setting: 1 If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each AC motor drive must be different and unique. 09.01 Transmission Speed Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps (bits / second) 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC, etc.) and AC motor drive. 09.02 Transmission Fault Treatment Factory Setting: 3 Settings 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur. See list of error messages below (see section 3.6.) 4-112 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 09.03 Time-out Detection Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Disable If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 09.04 Communication Protocol Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2> 1 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1> 2 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1> 3 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2> 4 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1> 5 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1> 6 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1> 7 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2> 8 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2> 9 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1> 10 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2> 11 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2> 1. Control by PC or PLC A VFD-E can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09.04. Code Description: The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset. Therefore, there is at least 1 second delay time in master station. ASCII mode: Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 ‘7’ 37H 4-113 Chapter 4 Parameters| Character ASCII code ‘8’ 38H ‘9’ 39H ‘A’ 41H ‘B’ 42H ‘C’ 43H ‘D’ 44H ‘E’ 45H ‘F’ 46H RTU mode: Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64 Hex. 2. Data Format 10-bit character frame (For ASCII): ( 7.N.2) Start bit 0 1 2 3 5 4 6 Stop bit Stop bit 7-bit character 10-bit character frame ( 7.E.1) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Even Stop parity bit 7-bit character 10-bit character frame ( 7.O.1) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Odd Stop parity bit 7-bit character 10-bit character frame ( 7.N.1) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Stop bit 5 6 Even Stop Stop parity bit bit 7-bit character 9-bit character frame ( 7.E.2) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 7-bit character 11-bit character frame ( 7.O.2) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Odd Stop Stop bit parity bit 7-bit character 11-bit character frame 4-114 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 11-bit character frame (For RTU): ( 8.N.2 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stop Stop bit bit 6 7 Even Stop parity bit 6 7 8-bit character 11-bit character frame ( 8.E.1 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 5 4 8-bit character 11-bit character frame ( 8.O.1 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 5 4 Odd Stop parity bit 8-bit character 11-bit character frame ( 8.N.1 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stop bit 6 7 Even Stop Stop parity bit bit 6 7 Odd Stop Stop parity bit bit 8-bit character 10-bit character frame ( 8.E.2 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 8-bit character 12-bit character frame ( 8.O.2 ) Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 8-bit character 12-bit character frame 3. Communication Protocol 3.1 Communication Data Frame: ASCII mode: STX Start character ‘:’ (3AH) Address Hi Communication address: Address Lo 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Command code: Function Lo 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA (n-1) Contents of data: to DATA 0 Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes n<=20, maximum of 40 ASCII codes Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-115 Chapter 4 Parameters| LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum: LRC CHK Lo 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes END Hi End characters: END Lo END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH) START A silent interval of more than 10 ms RTU mode: Address Communication address: 8-bit address Function Command code: 8-bit command DATA (n-1) to DATA 0 Contents of data: n×8-bit data, n<=40 (20 x 16-bit data) CRC CHK Low CRC check sum: CRC CHK High 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters END A silent interval of more than 10 ms 3.2 Address (Communication Address) Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0, means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the master device. 00H: broadcast to all AC drives 01H: AC drive of address 01 0FH: AC drive of address 15 10H: AC drive of address 16 : FEH: AC drive of address 254 For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H): ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H RTU mode: Address=10H 3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters) The format of data characters depends on the function code. 03H: read data from register 06H: write single register 08H: loop detection 4-116 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 10H: write multiple registers The available function codes and examples for VFD-E are described as follows: (1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers. Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H. ASCII mode: Response message: Command message: STX Address Function Starting data address ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘3’ STX Address Function ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘3’ ‘2’ Number of data ‘0’ ‘1’ (Count by byte) ‘4’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ Content of starting address ‘0’ 2102H ‘7’ ‘7’ Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘2’ LRC Check END ‘D’ Content of address 2103H ‘7’ CR LF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ LRC Check END ‘7’ ‘1’ CR LF RTU mode: Command message: Response message: Address 01H Address 01H Function 03H Function 03H Starting data address 21H Number of data 02H (count by byte) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 04H 4-117 Chapter 4 Parameters| Number of data 00H (count by word) 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H Content of address 2102H Content of address 2103H 17H 70H 00H 00H CRC CHK Low FEH CRC CHK High 5CH (2) 06H: single write, write single data to register. Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H. ASCII mode: Command message: STX Address Function ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘6’ Response message: STX Address Function ‘0’ Data address Data content ‘1’ ‘0’ END ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘6’ ‘0’ Data address ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘7’ ‘7’ Data content ‘0’ LRC Check ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘7’ ‘1’ CR LF ‘7’ ‘7’ ‘0’ LRC Check END ‘7’ ‘1’ CR LF RTU mode: Response message: Command message: Address 4-118 01H Address 01H Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Function Data address Data content 08H 00H 00H 17H 70H Function Data address Data content 08H 00H 00H 17H 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH CRC CHK High 1FH (3) 08H: loop detection This command is used to detect if the communication between master device (PC or PLC) and AC motor drive is normal. The AC motor drive will send the received message to the master device. ASCII mode: Command message: STX Address Function ‘:’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘8’ Response message: STX Address Function ‘0’ Data address Data content ‘0’ ‘0’ END ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘8’ ‘0’ Data address ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘7’ ‘7’ Data content ‘0’ LRC Check ‘:’ ‘7’ ‘0’ CR LF Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 ‘7’ ‘7’ ‘0’ LRC Check END ‘7’ ‘0’ CR LF 4-119 Chapter 4 Parameters| RTU mode: Response message: Command message: Address 01H Address 01H Function 08H Function 08H 00H Data address 00H 17H Data content 70H Data address Data content 00H 00H 17H 70H CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK Low EEH CRC CHK High 1FH CRC CHK High 1FH (4) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers) Example: Set the multi-step speed, Pr.05.00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05.01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H. ASCII Mode: Command message: STX ‘:’ Address 1 ‘0’ Address 0 ‘1’ Function 1 ‘1’ Function 0 ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘5’ Starting data address ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Number of data (count by word) ‘0’ ‘2’ ‘0’ Number of data (count by byte) ‘4’ ‘1’ ‘3’ The first data content ‘8’ ‘8’ ‘0’ ‘F’ The second data content ‘A’ ‘0’ ‘9’ LRC Check ‘A’ CR END LF 4-120 Response message: STX ‘:’ Address 1 ‘0’ Address 0 ‘1’ Function 1 ‘1’ Function 0 ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘5’ Starting data address ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Number of data (count by word) ‘0’ ‘2’ ‘E’ LRC Check ‘8’ CR END LF Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| RTU mode: Command message: Address 01H Function 10H Starting data 05H address 00H Number of data 00H’ (count by word) 02H Number of data 04 (count by byte) The first data 13H content 88H The second data 0FH content A0H CRC Check Low 4DH CRC Check High D9H Response message: Address 01H Function 10H Starting data address 05H 00H Number of data 00H (count by word) 02H CRC Check Low 41H CRC Check High 04H 3.4 Check sum ASCII mode: LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum. For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H. STX ‘:’ Address 1 ‘0’ Address 0 ‘1’ Function 1 ‘0’ Function 0 ‘3’ ‘0’ Starting data address ‘4’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-121 Chapter 4 Parameters| LRC Check 1 ‘F’ LRC Check 0 ‘6’ END 1 CR END 0 LF 01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H. RTU mode: Address 01H Function 03H Starting data address 21H 02H Number of data 00H (count by word) 02H CRC CHK Low 6FH CRC CHK High F7H CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps: Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH. Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register. Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register. Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3. Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit byte will have been processed. Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first. The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two arguments: Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer. 4-122 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){ int j; unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF; while(length--){ reg_crc ^= *data++; for(j=0;j<8;j++){ if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */ reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001; }else{ reg_crc=reg_crc >>1; } } } return reg_crc; } 3.5 Address list The contents of available addresses are shown as below: Content AC drive Parameters Address GGnnH Function GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for example, the address of Pr 04.01 is 0401H. Refer to chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can be read at one time. 00B: No function Command Write only Bit 0-1 01B: Stop 10B: Run 11B: Jog + Run Bit 2-3 Reserved 00B: No function 2000H Bit 4-5 01B: FWD 10B: REV 11B: Change direction Bit 6-7 Bit 8-15 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 00B: Comm. forced 1st accel/decel 01B: Comm. forced 2nd accel/decel Reserved 4-123 Chapter 4 Parameters| Content Address 2001H 2002H Status monitor Function Frequency command Bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on Bit 1 1: Reset Bit 2-15 Reserved Error code: 2100H Read only 0: No error occurred 1: Over-current (oc) 2: Over-voltage (ov) 3: IGBT Overheat (oH1) 4: Power Board Overheat (oH2) 5: Overload (oL) 6: Overload1 (oL1) 7: Overload2 (oL2) 8: External fault (EF) 9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel (ocA) 10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd) Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd) 11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state operation (ocn) 12: Ground Fault (GFF) 13: Low voltage (Lv) 14: PHL (Phase-Loss) 2100H 15: Base Block 16: Auto accel/decel failure (cFA) 17: Software protection enabled (codE) 18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (CF1.0) 19: Power Board CPU READ failure (CF2.0) 20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1) 21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2) 22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3) 23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4) 4-124 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Content Address Function 24: U-phase error (cF3.0) 25: V-phase error (cF3.1) 26: W-phase error (cF3.2) 27: DCBUS error (cF3.3) 2100H 28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4) 29: Power Board Overheat (cF3.5) 30: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1) 31: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF2.1) 32: ACI signal error (AErr) 33: Reserved 34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1) 2101H Status of AC drive 00B: RUN LED is off, STOP LED is on (The AC motor Drive stops) Bit 0-1 01B: RUN LED blinks, STOP LED is on (When AC motor drive decelerates to stop) 10B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED blinks (When AC motor drive is standby) 11B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED is off (When AC motor drive runs) Bit 2 1: JOG command Bit 3-4 00B: FWD LED is on, REV LED is off (When AC motor drive runs forward) 01B: FWD LED is on, REV LED blinks (When AC motor drive runs from reverse to forward) 10B: FWD LED blinks, REV LED is on (When AC motor drive runs from forward to reverse) 11B: FWD LED is off, REV LED is on (When AC motor drive runs reverse) Bit 5-7 Reserved Bit 8 1: Master frequency Controlled by communication interface Bit 9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-125 Chapter 4 Parameters| Content Address 2102H Function Bit 10 1: Operation command controlled by communication interface Bit 11-15 Reserved Frequency command (F) 2103H Output frequency (H) 2104H Output current (AXXX.X) 2105H Reserved 2106H Reserved 2107H Reserved 2108H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X) 2109H Output voltage (EXXX.X) 210AH Display temperature of IGBT (°C) 2116H User defined (Low word) 2117H User defined (High word) Note: 2116H is number display of Pr.00.04. High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places of 2116H. Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr.00.04. 3.6 Exception response: The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to the master device. The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition. The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the exception code that is described below. In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned. Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H: ASCII mode: 4-126 RTU mode: Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| STX ‘:’ Address 01H 86H Address Low ‘0’ Function Address High ‘1’ Exception code 02H Function Low ‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3H ‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H Function High Exception code ‘0’ ‘2’ LRC CHK Low ‘7’ LRC CHK High ‘7’ END 1 CR END 0 LF The explanation of exception codes: Exception Explanation code Illegal function code: 01 The function code received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive. Illegal data address: 02 The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC motor drive. Illegal data value: 03 04 The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive. Slave device failure: The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action. Communication time-out: 10 If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad. 3.7 Communication program of PC: The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode on a PC in C language. #include<stdio.h> #include<dos.h> Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-127 Chapter 4 Parameters| #include<conio.h> #include<process.h> #define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */ /* the address offset value relative to COM1 */ #define THR 0x0000 #define RDR 0x0000 #define BRDL 0x0000 #define IER 0x0001 #define BRDH 0x0001 #define LCR 0x0003 #define MCR 0x0004 #define LSR 0x0005 #define MSR 0x0006 unsigned char rdat[60]; /* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */ unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'}; void main(){ int i; outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt enable */ /* interrupt as data in */ outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80)); /* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */ outportb(PORT+BRDL,12); /* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/ outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00); outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH, <7,O,1>=0AH, <8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */ for(i=0;i<=16;i++){ while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */ outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]); /* send data to THR */ } i=0; while(!kbhit()){ if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */ rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */ } 09.05 4-128 } } Reserved Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 09.06 Reserved 09.07 Response Delay Time Settings Unit: 2ms 0 ~ 200 (400msec) Factory Setting: 1 This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following. 1 unit = 2 msec. RS485 BUS PC or PLC command Response Message of AC Drive Handling time of AC drive Max.: 6msec 09.08 Response Delay Time Pr.09.07 Transmission Speed for USB Card Factory Setting: 2 Settings 0 Baud rate 4800 bps 1 Baud rate 9600 bps 2 Baud rate 19200 bps 3 Baud rate 38400 bps 4 Baud rate 57600 bps This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card. 09.09 Communication Protocol for USB Card Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2> 1 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1> 2 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1> 3 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2> 4 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1> 5 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1> 6 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1> 7 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2> 8 Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2> 9 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1> 10 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2> 11 Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2> Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-129 Chapter 4 Parameters| 09.10 Transmission Fault Treatment for USB Card Factory Setting: 0 Settings 4-130 0 Warn and keep operating 1 Warn and RAMP to stop 2 Warn and COAST to stop 3 No warning and keep operating This parameter is set to how to react when transmission errors occurs. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 09.11 Time-out Detection for USB Card Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec 0.0 09.12 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Disable COM port for PLC Communication (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 RS485 1 USB card Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-131 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 10: PID Control 10.00 PID Set Point Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 10.01 0 Disable 1 Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys 2 AVI 0 ~ +10VDC 3 ACI 4 ~ 20mA / AVI2 0 ~ +10VDC 4 PID set point (Pr.10.11) Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC). 1 Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC). 2 Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC). 3 Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC). Note that the measured variable (feedback) controls the output frequency (Hz). Select input terminal accordingly. Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for Pr.10.00 (Master Frequency). When Pr.10.00 is set to 2 or 3, the set point (Master Frequency) for PID control is obtained from the AVI or ACI/AVI2 external terminal (0 to +10V or 4-20mA) or from multi-step speed. When Pr.10.00 is set to 1, the set point is obtained from the keypad. Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. 10.02 Proportional Gain (P) Settings Unit: 0. 1 0.0 to 10.0 Factory Setting: 1.0 This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P). If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective. With 10% deviation (error) and P=1, the output will be P x10% x Master Frequency. 4-132 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| NOTE The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning. 10.03 Integral Time ( I ) Settings 0.00 to 100.0 sec 0.00 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.00 Disable This parameter specifies integral control (continual sum of the deviation) and associated gain (I). When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed, the output is equal to the input (deviation) once the integral time setting is attained. NOTE The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning. 10.04 Derivative Control (D) Settings 0.00 to 1.00 sec Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 0.00 This parameter specifies derivative control (rate of change of the input) and associated gain (D). With this parameter set to 1, the PID output is equal to differential time x (present deviation − previous deviation). It increases the response speed but it may cause overcompensation. NOTE The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning. 10.05 Upper Bound for Integral Control Settings 0 to 100 % Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 100 This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) x (Pr.10.05). This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-133 Chapter 4 Parameters| 10.06 Settings Unit: 0.1 Primary Delay Filter Time 0.0 to 2.5 sec Factory Setting: 0.0 To avoid amplification of measurement noise in the controller output, a derivative digital filter is inserted. This filter helps to dampen oscillations. The complete PID diagram is in the following: Setpoint P I 10.02 10.03 + - Integral gain limit + + 10.05 + Output Freq. Limit 10.07 Digital filter 10.06 Freq. Command D 10.04 Input Freq. Gain PID feedback 10.01 10.10 10.07 Unit: 1 PID Output Frequency Limit Settings 0 to 110 % Factory Setting: 100 This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) X Pr.10.07 %. This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. An overall limit for the output frequency can be set in Pr.01.07. 10.08 PID Feedback Signal Detection Time Settings Unit: 0.1 0.0 to d 3600 sec Factory Setting: 60.0 This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning (see Pr.10.09) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time. If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal. 10.09 Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals (for PID feedback error) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 4-134 0 Warning and RAMP to stop 1 Warning and COAST to stop 2 Warning and keep operating Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| This function is only for ACI signal. AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback) are abnormal according to Pr.10.16. 10.10 Gain Over the PID Detection Value Settings 0.0 to 10.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 1.0 This function is only for ACI signal. This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value. Refer to PID control block diagram in Pr.10.06 for detail. 10.11 Source of PID Set point Settings Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.0Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr.10.00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz. 10.12 PID Offset Level Settings 10.13 Unit: 0.1 1.0 to 50.0% Factory Setting: 10.0 Detection Time of PID Offset Settings Unit: 0.1 0.1 to 300.0 sec Factory Setting: 5.0 This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback. When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr.10.12 for a time exceeding the setting of Pr.10.13, the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr.03.00 ~ Pr.03.01 is set to 16. 10.14 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time Settings 10.15 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.0 Hz Factory Setting: 0.00 Wakeup Frequency Settings 0.0 to 6550 sec Sleep Frequency Settings 10.16 Unit: 0.1 Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 600.0 Hz When the actual output frequency Factory Setting: 0.00 ≤ Pr.10.15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14, the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode. When the actual frequency command > Pr.10.16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14, the AC motor drive will restart. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-135 Chapter 4 Parameters| When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode, frequency command is still calculated by PID. When frequency reaches wake up frequency, AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01.05 minimum frequency following the V/f curve. The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency. Frequency frequency calculated by PID 10.16 The limit of decel. time output frequency 10.15 The limit of accel. time 01.05 Time 10.14 lower bound of frequency Fmin Fmin<Fsleep< Fcmd=0 Fsleep lower bound of frequency Fout = 0 When output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time, it will go in sleep mode. When min. output frequency ≦ PID frequency ≦ lower bound of frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time), frequency will be 0 (in sleep mode). If sleep function is disabled, frequency command = lower bound frequency. When PID frequency < min. output frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency ≤ sleep frequency and time > detection time), output frequency =0 (in sleep mode). If output frequency ≤ sleep frequency but time < detection time, frequency command = lower frequency. If sleep function is disabled, output frequency =0. 4-136 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 10.17 Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 By PID control 1 By Minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05) This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-137 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 11: Multi-function Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 11 parameters. See Appendix B for details. 11.00 Multi-function Output Terminal MO2/RA2 11.01 Multi-function Output Terminal MO3/RA3 11.02 Multi-function Output Terminal MO4/RA4 11.03 Multi-function Output Terminal MO5/RA5 11.04 Multi-function Output Terminal MO6/RA6 11.05 Multi-function Output Terminal MO7/RA7 Settings Settings 0 to 21 Factory Setting: 0 Function Description 0 No Function 1 AC Drive Operational Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”. Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output Attained frequency setting. 2 3 Zero Speed 4 Over-Torque Detection 5 6 7 8 4-138 Baseblock (B.B.) Indication Active when Command Frequency is lower than the Minimum Output Frequency. Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03 ~ Pr.06.05) Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multifunction input (setting 09). Low-Voltage Indication Active when low voltage (Lv) is detected. Operation Mode Active when operation command is controlled by external Indication terminal. Fault Indication Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3, HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF). Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings 9 10 11 12 13 14 Function Desired Frequency Attained Terminal Count Value Attained Preliminary Count Value Attained Over Voltage Stall supervision Over Current Stall supervision Heat Sink Overheat Warning Description Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03.02) is attained. Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value. Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value. Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating Active when the Over Current Stall function operating When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off the drive. When it is higher than 85oC (185oF), it will be ON. 15 Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level 16 PID supervision Active when the PID function is operating 17 Forward command Active when the direction command is FWD 18 Reverse command Active when the direction command is REV Zero Speed Output Active unless there is an output frequency present at Signal terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. 19 Communication Warning 20 (FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, Active when there is a Communication Warning SAvE) 21 Brake Control (Desired Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03.14. Deactivated when Frequency Attained) output frequency ≤Pr.03.15 after STOP command. 11.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI7) 11.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) 11.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI9) 11.09 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI10) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-139 Chapter 4 Parameters| 11.10 11.11 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI11) Multi-function Input Terminal (MI12) Settings Settings 0 1 0 to 23 Function No Function Factory Setting: 0 Description Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they have no effect on operation. Multi-Step Speed Command 1 These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of the table in 2 3 Multi-Step Speed Command 2 Pr.04.08. NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output Multi-Step Speed speed by programming the AC motor drive’s internal PLC Command 3 function. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for 4 Multi-Step Speed application. Command 4 The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on 5 External Reset the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are cleared this input can be used to reset the drive. 6 Accel/Decel Inhibit Accel/Decel Time 7 Selection Command When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed. Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12). See explanation at the end of this table. Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input 8 Jog Operation Control Terminals MI7 ∼ MI12 (Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11) for Jog control. NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15) 4-140 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Function Description Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for external Base Block control. 9 External Base NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor Block drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When (Refer to Pr.08.06) base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its speed search function and synchronize with the motor speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency. 10 UP: Increase Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is Master Frequency received or continuously when the input stays active. When both inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency 11 DOWN: Decrease increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This Master Frequency function is also called “motor potentiometer”. Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi-function Input 12 Counter Trigger Terminals MI7 ∼ MI12 (Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11) to increment the AC drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is incremented by 1. 13 Counter Reset 14 External Fault When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06. Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi-function Input Terminals MI7 ∼ MI12 (Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11) to be External Fault (E.F.) inputs. 15 PID function When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be disabled disabled. AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of 16 Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC motor drive will restart from 0Hz. 17 Parameter lock When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and enable write parameters is disabled. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-141 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Function Operation Command 18 Selection (Pr.02.01 21 OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 18 is set. See the terminals) explanation below this table. Operation ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad Selection (Pr 02.01 OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting setting/Digital Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 19 is set. See the Keypad) explanation below this table. Operation ON: Operation command via Communication Command 20 ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals setting/external Command 19 Description Selection (Pr 02.01 OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting setting/ Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 20 is set. See the Communication) explanation below this table. Forward/Reverse This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If “Pr.02.04=0”) Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer Source of second 22 frequency command enabled to Pr.02.00 and 02.09. ON: 2nd Frequency command source OFF: 1st Frequency command source ON: Run PLC Program OFF: Stop PLC Program When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled, it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC 23 Run/Stop PLC program. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the Program PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02. When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be invalid when AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status. 4-142 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Settings Function Description When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is enabled, it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can Download/Execute/ 24 Monitor PLC Program (PLC2) download/execute/monitor PLC. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02. When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-143 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters. See Appendix B for details. 12.00 AI1 Function Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 12.01 0 Disabled 1 Source of the 1st frequency 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 PID Set Point (PID enable) 4 Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback AI1 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 ACI2 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA) 1 AVI3 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V) Besides parameters settings, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch. AVI3 AVI4 ACI2 ACI3 12.02 Min. AVI3 Input Voltage Settings 12.03 Min. AVI3 Scale Percentage Settings 12.04 0.0 to 100.0% Max. AVI3 Input Voltage Settings 4-144 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0 to 10.0V AVO1 AVO2 ACO1 ACO2 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 10.0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 12.05 Max. AVI3 Scale Percentage Settings 12.06 Min. ACI2 Input Current Settings 12.07 0.0 to 20.0mA Max. ACI2 Scale Percentage Settings 12.10 0.0 to 100.0% Max. ACI2 Input Current Settings 12.09 0.0 to 20.0mA Min. ACI2 Scale Percentage Settings 12.08 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0 to 100.0% Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 4.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 20.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 AI2 Function Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 12.11 0 Disabled 1 Source of the 1st frequency 2 Source of the 2nd frequency 3 PID Set Point (PID enable) 4 Positive PID feedback 5 Negative PID feedback AI2 Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 ACI3 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA) 1 AVI4 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V) Besides parameters settings, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-145 Chapter 4 Parameters| AVI3 AVI4 ACI2 ACI3 12.12 Min. AVI4 Input Voltage Settings 12.13 Min. AVI4 Scale Percentage Settings 12.14 0.0 to 20.0mA Max. ACI3 Scale Percentage Settings 4-146 0.0 to 100.0% Max. ACI3 Input Current Settings 12.19 0.0 to 20.0mA Min. ACI3 Scale Percentage Settings 12.18 0.0 to 100.0% Min. ACI3 Input Current Settings 12.17 0.0 to 10.0V Max. AVI4 Scale Percentage Settings 12.16 0.0 to 100.0% Max. AVI4 Input Voltage Settings 12.15 0.0 to 10.0V 0.0 to 100.0% AVO1 AVO2 ACO1 ACO2 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 10.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 4.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 0.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 20.0 Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 100.0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 12.20 AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 AVO1 1 ACO1 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA) 2 ACO1 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA) Besides parameter setting, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch. AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2 ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2 12.21 AO1 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current) This parameter is used to choose analog frequency (0-+10Vdc) or analog current (4-20mA) to correspond to the AC motor drive’s output frequency or current. 12.22 AO1 Analog Output Gain Settings 1 to 200% Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 100 This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage range. When Pr.12.21 is set to 0, analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive’s output frequency. When Pr.12.22 is set to 100, the max. output frequency (Pr.01.00) setting corresponds to the AFM output (+10VDC or 20mA) When Pr.12.21 is set to 1, analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive’s output current. When Pr.12.22 is set to 100, the 2.5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output (+10VDC or 20mA) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-147 Chapter 4 Parameters| NOTE If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V, refer to following formula to set Pr.12.22: Pr.12.22 = [(full scale voltage)/10]*100%. Example: When using voltmeter with full scale (5V), Pr.12.22 should be set to 5/10*100%=50%. If Pr.12.21 is set to 0, the output voltage will correspond to the max. output frequency. 12.23 AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 AVO2 1 ACO2 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA) 2 ACO2 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA) Besides parameter setting, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch. AVI3 AVI4 ACI2 ACI3 12.24 AVO1 AVO2 ACO1 ACO2 AO2 Analog Output Signal Factory Setting: 0 Settings 12.25 4-148 Analog Frequency 1 Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current) AO2 Analog Output Gain Settings 0 Unit: 1 1 to 200% Factory Setting: 100 Setting method for the AO2 is the same as the AO1. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12 parameters. See Appendix B for details. 13.00 PG Input Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0 Disable PG 1 Single phase 2 Forward/Counterclockwise rotation 3 Reverse/Clockwise rotation The relationship between the motor rotation and PG input is illustrated below: A phase leads B phase A phase FWD CCW REV CW PULSE GENERATOR 13.01 13.00=2 B phase leads A phase A phase B phase 13.00=3 A phase CW B phase PG Pulse Range Settings PG B phase 1 to 20000 Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 600 A Pulse Generator (PG) is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control. 13.02 Motor Pole Number (Motor 0) Settings Unit: 1 Factory Setting: 4 The pole number should be even (can’t be odd). 13.03 Proportional Gain (P) Settings 2 to 10 0.0 to 10.0 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.0 This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P), and is used for speed control with PG feedback. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-149 Chapter 4 Parameters| 13.04 Integral Gain ( I ) Settings 0.00 to 100.00 sec 0.00 Unit: 0.01 Factory Setting: 1.00 Disable This parameter specifies integral control and associated gain (I), and is used for speed control with PG feedback. 13.05 Speed Control Output Frequency Limit Settings Unit: 0.01 0.00 to 100.00Hz Factory Setting: 10.00 This parameter limits the amount of correction by the PI control on the output frequency when controlling speed via PG feedback. It can limit the maximum output frequency. output frequency Frequency command Speed detection - + P 13.03 Output Frequency Limit + + + 13.05 I 13.04 13.06 Speed Feedback Display Filter Settings Unit: 1 0 to 9999 (*2ms) Factory Setting: 500 When Pr.0.04 is set to 14, its display will be updated regularly. This update time is set by Pr.13.06. 13.09 Speed Feedback Filter Settings Factory Setting: 16 This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card. 13.07 Time for Feedback Signal Fault Settings 0.1 to 10.0 sec 0.0 Unit: 1 0 to 9999 (*2ms) Unit: 0.1 Factory Setting: 1.0 Disabled This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a warning (see Pr.13.08) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time. 4-150 If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| 13.08 Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0 Warn and RAMP to stop 1 Warn and COAST to stop 2 Warn and keep operating AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder) feedback) are abnormal. 13.10 Source of the High-speed Counter (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Factory Setting: Read only Settings 0 PG card 1 PLC Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-151 Chapter 4 Parameters| 4.4 Different Parameters for VFD*E*C Models Software version for VFD*E*C is V1.00 for power board and V2.00 for control board. : The parameter can be set during operation. Group 0 User Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Parameter can be read/written 1: All parameters are read only 00.02 Parameter Reset 6: Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12) 0 10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V) 0: Display the frequency command value (Fxxx) 1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx) 00.03 Start-up Display Selection 2: Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 0 3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04 4: FWD/REV command 5: PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 00.04 Content of Multifunction Display 0: Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx) 0 1: Display the counter value (c) 2: Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u) 4: Display output voltage (E) 5: Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%) 6: Output power factor angle (n) 7: Display output power (P) 4-152 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 8: Display the estimated value of torque as it relates to current (t) 9: Display AVI (I) (V) 10: Display ACI / AVI2 (i) (mA/V) 11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (°C) 12: Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.) 13: Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.) 14: Display PG speed in RPM (G) 15: Display motor number (M) Group 1 Basic Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 01.11 Accel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 1.0 01.12 Decel Time 2 0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec 1.0 Group 2 Operation Method Parameters Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multifunction Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. 02.00 Source of First Master Frequency Command 1: 0 to +10V from AVI 2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2 5 3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication 4: Digital keypad potentiometer 5: CANopen communication 02.01 Source of First Operation Command 0: Digital keypad 5 1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-153 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled. 4: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 5: CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled. 0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multifunction Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used frequency saved. 02.09 Source of Second Frequency Command 1: 0 to +10V from AVI 2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2 0 3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication 4: Digital keypad potentiometer 5: CANopen communication Read Only 02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00) Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09) Bit2=1: by Multi-input function ## Bit3=1: by PLC Freq command (NOT for VFD*E*C models) Read Only Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad 02.17 Display the Operation Command Source Bit1=1: by RS485 communication Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode ## Bit3=1: by Multi-input function Bit5=1: by CANopen communication Group 3 Output Function Parameters Parameter Explanation 03.09 Reserved 03.10 Reserved Settings Factory Customer Setting Settings Factory Customer Setting Group 4 Input Function Parameters Parameter Explanation 04.05 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3) 4-154 0: No function 1 1: Multi-Step speed command 1 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation 04.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4) Settings Factory Customer Setting 2: Multi-Step speed command 2 3: Multi-Step speed command 3 2 4: Multi-Step speed command 4 5: External reset 04.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5) 6: Accel/Decel inhibit 3 7: Accel/Decel time selection command 8: Jog Operation 04.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6) 9: External base block 23 10: Up: Increment master frequency 11: Down: Decrement master frequency 12: Counter Trigger Signal 13: Counter reset 14: E.F. External Fault Input 15: PID function disabled 16: Output shutoff stop 17: Parameter lock enable 18: Operation command selection (external terminals) 19: Operation command selection(keypad) 20: Operation command selection (communication) 21: FWD/REV command 22: Source of second frequency command 23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models) 24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program (PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 25: Simple position function 26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection) 27: Motor selection (bit 0) 28: Motor selection (bit 1) 04.24 Reserved Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-155 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter 04.25 Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Settings Factory Customer Setting Reserved Group 7 Motor Parameters Parameter Explanation 07.08 Torque Compensation Time Constant 0.01 ~10.00 Sec 0.30 Group 9 Communication Parameters Parameter 09.12 09.13 Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Reserved CANopen Communication Address 0: disable 1 1: 1 to 127 0: 1M 1: 500K 09.14 CANbus Baud Rate 2: 250K 0 3: 125K 4: 100K 5: 50K 09.15 Gain of CANbus Frequency 0.00~2.00 1.00 bit 0 : CANopen Guarding Time out bit 1 : CANopen Heartbeat Time out bit 2 : CANopen SYNC Time out 09.16 CANbus Warning bit 3 : CANopen SDO Time out bit 4 : CANopen SDO buffer overflow Readonly bit 5 : CANbus Off bit 6 : Error protocol of CANopen bit 7 : CANopen boot up fault Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card 4-156 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation 11.06 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI7) Settings 0: No function Factory Customer Setting 0 1: Multi-Step speed command 1 2: Multi-Step speed command 2 3: Multi-Step speed command 3 11.07 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) 0 4: Multi-Step speed command 4 5: External reset 6: Accel/Decel inhibit 11.08 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI9) 0 7: Accel/Decel time selection command 8: Jog Operation 9: External base block 11.09 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI10) 0 10: Up: Increment master frequency 11: Down: Decrement master frequency 12: Counter Trigger Signal 11.10 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI11) 0 13: Counter reset 14: E.F. External Fault Input 15: PID function disabled 11.11 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI12) 16: Output shutoff stop 0 17: Parameter lock enable 18: Operation command selection (external terminals) 19: Operation command selection (keypad) 20: Operation command selection (communication) 21: FWD/REV command 22: Source of second frequency command 23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models) 24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program (PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models) 25: Simple position function 26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 4-157 Chapter 4 Parameters| Parameter Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting 27: Motor selection (bit 0) 28: Motor selection (bit 1) Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card Parameter 13.10 4-158 Explanation Settings Factory Customer Setting Reserved Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 Over Current (OC) ocA Over-current during acceleration Yes Remove short circuit or ground fault ocd Over current Check if there is any short circuits and grounding between the U, V, W and motor No Reduce the load or increase the power of AC motor drive No Reduce torque compensation OC Over-current during deceleration Yes No No Check if load is too large No No No No Suitable torque compensation Yes Yes Reduce torque compensation No Check if Check if acceleration time No deceleration time is too short by is too short by load inertia. load inertia. Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or error due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Yes No Has load changed suddenly? Yes Yes Yes Can deceleration Can acceleration time be made longer? time be made longer? No No Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive Increase accel/decel time Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Check braking method. Please contact DELTA 5-1 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.2 Ground Fault Is output circuit(cable or motor) of AC motor drive grounded? GFF Ground fault Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. No Yes Remove ground fault 5.3 Over Voltage (OV) Over voltage No Reduce voltage to be within spec. Is voltage within specification Yes Has over-voltage occurred without load Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Yes No No When OV occurs, check if the voltage of DC BUS is greater than protection value Yes Yes Increase deceleration time No Dose OV occur when sudden acceleration stops No Yes Increase acceleration time Yes Yes Increase setting time No Reduce moment of inertia No Reduce moment of load inertia Need to consider using brake unit or DC brake No Use brake unit or DC brake No Yes Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA. 5-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.4 Low Voltage (Lv) Low voltage Is input power correct? Or power cut, Yes including momentary power loss Restart after reset No Check if there is any malfunction Yes component or disconnection in power supply circuit Change defective component and check connection No No Check if voltage is within specification Make necessary corrections, such as change power supply system for requirement Yes Check if there is heavy load with high start current in the same power system Yes Using the different power supply for this drive and heavy load system No No Check if Lv occurs when breaker and magnetic contactor is ON No Yes Check if voltage between +/B1 No and - is greater than 200VDC (for 115V/230V models) 400VDC (for 460V models) Suitable power transformer capacity Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction. Please contact DELTA. Yes Control circuit has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 5-3 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.5 Over Heat (OH) AC motor drive overheats Heat sink overheats No Check if temperature of heat sink O is greater than 90 C Temperature detection malfunctions. Please contact DELTA. Yes Is load too large Yes Reduce load No If cooling fan functions normally No Change cooling fan Yes Check if cooling fan is jammed Yes Remove obstruction No Check if surrounding temperature is within specification Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. No Yes Adjust surrounding temperature to specification 5.6 Overload OL OL1/ OL2 Check for correct settings at Pr. 06-06 and 06-07 No Modify setting Yes Is load too large No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Yes Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive 5-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal Abnormal display or no display Yes Cycle power to AC motor drive Fix connector and eliminate noise No No Display normal? Check if all connectors are connect correctly and no noise is present Yes Yes AC motor drive works normally AC motor drive has malfunction. Please contact DELTA. 5.8 Phase Loss (PHL) Phase loss Check wiring at R, S and T terminals No Correct wiring Yes Check if the screws of terminals are tightened No Tighten all screws Yes Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced Yes No Please check the wiring and power system for abnormal power Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 5-5 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.9 Motor cannot Run Check No KPE-LE02 for normal display Motor cannot run Yes No It can run when no faults occur Input "RUN" command by keypad Set them to ON Yes Yes Check if there is any fault code displayed Reset after clearing fault and then RUN Check if non-fuse No breaker and magnetic contactor are ON Check if input voltage is normal Yes No No Check if any faults occur, such as Lv, PHL or disconnection Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Yes Press RUN key to check if it can run Press UP key to set frequency Check if the wiring Yes No Check if input FWD No of terminal FWD Change switch or relay or REV command and between Press UP to REV-DCM is correct check if motor Yes can run No No No No Set frequency or not Correct connection Yes Modify frequency setting No if upper bound freq. Check if the parameter and setting freq. is setting and wiring of Change defective lower than the min. Yes analog signal and potentiometer and output freq. multi-step speed relay No are correct Yes Check if there is any No output voltage from terminals U, V and W Motor has malfunction No If load is too large Yes Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction. Please contact DELTA. Yes Yes Check if the setting Yes of torque compensation is correct No Check if motor connection is correct No Connect correctly Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load. For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released. Increase the setting of torque compensation 5-6 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed For VFD*E*C models, no PLC function is supported. Please follow the dashed line to skip the PLC parts. Motor can run but cannot change speed Yes Modify the setting Check if the setting of the max. frequency is too low Yes Yes No If the execution time is too long Check to see if frequency is out of range (upper/lower) boundaries No Yes Yes No If finished with executing PLC program Press UP/DOWN key Yes to see if speed has any change If the PLC program No Yes is executed No Yes Modify the setting If there is any change of the signal that sets Yes frequency (0-10V and 4-20mA) Check if the PLC program is correct No Check if the wiring between MI1~MI6 to DCM is correct Yes Check if frequency for each step is different No No No Check if the wiring of external terminal is correct Correct wiring No Yes Change defective potentiometer Yes Change frequencysetting No Check if accel./decel. time is set correctly Yes Please set suitable accel./decel. time by load inertia Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 5-7 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration Check if acceleration Yes time is too short Motor stalls during acceleration Increase setting time No Yes Check if the inertia Yes of the motor and load is too high No Thicken or shorten the wiring between the motor or AC motor drive Yes Use special motor? No Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Check for low voltage at input No Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Yes Check if the load torque is too high No Check if the torque Yes compensation is suitable Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA No Increase torque compensation 5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected Motor does not run as expected Check Pr. 01-01 thru Pr. 01-06 and torque compensation settings No Adjust Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06 and lower torque compensation Yes Run in low speed continuously Yes Please use specific motor No Is load too large No Yes Reduce load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive Check if output voltage of U, V, W Yes is balanced Motor has malfunction No Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation due to noise. Please contact DELTA. 5-8 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction. It may cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, there are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive. But this has its limits. Therefore, solving it from the outside as follows will be the best. 1. 2. Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges. Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them separated from the power circuit wiring. 3. Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for long length. 4. The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded independently, i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other power equipment. 5. Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from the power circuit. In short, solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of “no product”(disconnect disturbing equipment), “no spread”(limit emission for disturbing equipment) and “no receive”(enhance immunity). 5.14 Environmental Condition Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental conditions. Here are some remedial measures if necessary. 1. To prevent vibration, the use of anti-vibration dampers is the last choice. Vibrations must be within the specification. Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive. 2. Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location, free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent corrosion and poor contacts. Poor insulation in a humid location can cause shortcircuits. If necessary, install the AC motor drive in a dust-proof and painted enclosure and in particular situations, use a completely sealed enclosure. 3. The ambient temperature should be within the specification. Too high or too low temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to periodically check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary. In addition, the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures, making cabinet heating necessary. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 5-9 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting| 4. Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Use an air conditioner and/or exsiccator. 5.15 Affecting Other Machines An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons. Some solutions are: High Harmonics at Power Side High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by: 1. Separate the power system: use a transformer for AC motor drive. 2. Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive. 3. If phase lead capacitors are used (never on the AC motor drive output!!), use serial reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics. serial reactor phase lead capacitor Motor Temperature Rises When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan, the cooling will be bad at low speeds, causing the motor to overheat. Besides, high harmonics at the output increases copper and core losses. The following measures should be used depending on load and operation range. 1. Use a motor with independent ventilation (forced external cooling) or increase the motor rated power. 5-10 2. Use a special inverter duty motor. 3. Do NOT run at low speeds for long time. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance 6.1 Fault Code Information The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display. The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication. NOTE Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal. 6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 1. 2. 3. Over current Abnormal increase in current. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. Over voltage The DC bus voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value. 2. 3. 4. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Check if motor power corresponds with the AC motor drive output power. Check the wiring connections to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 for possible short circuits. Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for possible short circuits, also to ground. Check for loose contacts between AC motor drive and motor. Increase the Acceleration Time. Check for possible excessive loading conditions at the motor. If there are still any abnormal conditions when operating the AC motor drive after a shortcircuit is removed and the other points above are checked, it should be sent back to manufacturer. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range. Check for possible voltage transients. DC-bus over-voltage may also be caused by motor regeneration. Either increase the Decel. Time or add an optional brake resistor (and brake unit). Check whether the required brake power is within the specified limits. 6-1 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 1. 2. Overheating Heat sink temperature too high 3. 4. 5. Low voltage The AC motor drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value. Overload The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current. NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150% of the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds. Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip Overload 2 Motor overload. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified temperature range. Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed. Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat sink fins. Check the fan and clean it. Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation. (See chapter 1) Check whether the input voltage falls within the AC motor drive rated input voltage range. Check for abnormal load in motor. Check for correct wiring of input power to R-ST (for 3-phase models) without phase loss. Check whether the motor is overloaded. Reduce torque compensation setting in Pr.07.02. Use the next higher power AC motor drive model. Check for possible motor overload. Check electronic thermal overload setting. Use a higher power motor. Reduce the current level so that the drive output current does not exceed the value set by the Motor Rated Current Pr.07.00. 1. Reduce the motor load. 2. Adjust the over-torque detection setting to an appropriate setting (Pr.06.03 to Pr.06.05). CC (current clamp) OV hardware error Return to the factory. GFF hardware error OC hardware error 1. External Base Block. (Refer to Pr. 08.07) 6-2 2. When the external input terminal (B.B) is active, the AC motor drive output will be turned off. Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to operate the AC motor drive again. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 1. 2. Over-current during acceleration 3. 4. 1. Over-current during deceleration 2. 3. 1. Over-current during constant speed operation 2. 3. 1. External Fault 2. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output lines. Torque boost too high: Decrease the torque compensation setting in Pr.07.02. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the Acceleration Time. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output line. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the Deceleration Time. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the output line. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for possible motor stall. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher power model. When multi-function input terminals (MI3-MI9) are set to external fault, the AC motor drive stops output U, V and W. Give RESET command after fault has been cleared. Internal EEPROM can not be programmed. Return to the factory. Internal EEPROM can not be programmed. Return to the factory. Internal EEPROM can not be read. Internal EEPROM can not be read. 1. 2. 1. 2. Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting. Return to the factory. Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting. Return to the factory. U-phase error V-phase error W-phase error Return to the factory. OV or LV Temperature sensor error Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 6-3 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Fault Name Fault Descriptions Ground fault Auto accel/decel failure Communication Error Corrective Actions When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC motor drive power module may be damaged. NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive protection, not for protection of the user. 1. Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged. 2. Check for possible poor insulation at the output line. 1. Check if the motor is suitable for operation by AC motor drive. 2. Check if the regenerative energy is too large. 3. Load may have changed suddenly. 1. Check the RS485 connection between the AC motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires and wiring to correct pins. 2. Check if the communication protocol, address, transmission speed, etc. are properly set. 3. Use the correct checksum calculation. 4. Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for detail information. Software protection failure Return to the factory. Analog signal error Check the wiring of ACI 1. PID feedback signal error 2. Phase Loss Check input phase wiring for loose contacts. Auto Tuning Error 1. 2. Check cabling between drive and motor Retry again 1. 2. Press RESET key to set all parameters to factory setting. Return to the factory. Motor overheat protection 1. 2. Check if the motor is overheat Check Pr.07.12 to Pr.07.17 settings PG signal error 1. 2. Check the wiring of PG card Try another PG card Communication time-out error on the control board or power board CANopen Guarding Time out (Only for VFDxxxExxC) 6-4 Check parameter settings (Pr.10.01) and AVI/ACI wiring. Check for possible fault between system response time and the PID feedback signal detection time (Pr.10.08) Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions CANopen Heartbeat Time out (Only for VFDxxxExxC) Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus CANopen SYNC Time out (Only for VFDxxxExxC) Check if CANopen synchronous message is abnormal CANopen SDO Time out (Only for VFDxxxExxC) Check if command channels are full CANopen SDO buffer overflow(Only for VFDxxxExxC) 1. 2. Too short time between commands, please check SDO message sent from the master Reset CAN bus CAN bus off(Only for VFDxxxExxC) 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Check if it connects to terminal resistor Check if the signal is abnormal Check if the master is connected Check if the master is connected Reset CAN bus CAN Boot up fault(Only for VFDxxxExxC) Error communication protocol of CANopen (Only for VFDxxxExxC) Check if the communication protocol is correct Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 6-5 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| 6.1.2 Reset There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault: 1. 2. Press key on keypad. Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 05) and then set to be ON. 3. Send “RESET” command by communication. NOTE Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or personal injury due to immediate operation. 6.2 Maintenance and Inspections Modern AC motor drives are based on solid-state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check-up of the AC motor drive regularly. Daily Inspection: Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are: 1. Whether the motors are operating as expected. 2. Whether the installation environment is abnormal. 3. Whether the cooling system is operating as expected. 4. Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation. 5. Whether the motors are overheating during operation. 6. Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter. Periodic Inspection: Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by measuring the voltage between 6-6 ~ . It should be less than 25VDC. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| DANGER! 1. 2. Disconnect AC power before processing! Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are allowed. 3. Never reassemble internal components or wiring. 4. Prevent static electricity. Periodical Maintenance Ambient environment Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Check the ambient temperature, humidity, vibration and see if there are any dust, gas, oil or water drops Visual inspection and measurement with equipment with standard specification { Check if there are any dangerous objects in the environment Visual inspection { Half One Year Year Voltage Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Check if the voltage of main circuit and control circuit is correct Measure with multimeter with standard specification Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Half One Year Year { 6-7 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Keypad Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Is the display clear for reading? Visual inspection { Any missing characters? Visual inspection { Half One Year Year Mechanical parts Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half One Year Year If there is any abnormal sound or vibration Visual and aural inspection { If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws { If any part is deformed or damaged Visual inspection { If there is any color change by overheating Visual inspection { If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection { Main circuit Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily If there are any loose or missing screws 6-8 Tighten or replace the screw Half One Year Year { If machine or insulator is deformed, cracked, damaged or with changed color change due to overheating or ageing NOTE: Please ignore the color change of copper plate { If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection { Visual inspection Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Terminals and wiring of main circuit Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily Half One Year Year If the wiring shows change of color change or deformation due to overheat Visual inspection { If the insulation of wiring is damaged or the color has changed Visual inspection { If there is any damage Visual inspection { DC capacity of main circuit Check Items Methods and Criterion Maintenance Period Daily If there is any leakage of liquid, change of color, cracks or deformation Visual inspection Measure static capacity when required Static capacity Half One Year Year { ≥ initial value X 0.85 { Resistor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily If there is any peculiar smell or insulator cracks due to overheating If there is any disconnection Half One Year Year Visual inspection, smell { Visual inspection or measure with multimeter after removing wiring between +/B1 ~ - { Resistor value should be within ± 10% Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 6-9 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Transformer and reactor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar smell Visual, aural inspection and smell Half One Year Year { Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection. Tighten screw if necessary. { If the contact works correctly Visual inspection { Half One Year Year Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily 6-10 Half One Year Year If there are any loose screws and connectors Tighten the screws and press the connectors firmly in place. { If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual inspection and smell { If there is any crack, damage, deformation or corrosion Visual inspection { If there is any leaked liquid or deformation in capacitors Visual inspection { Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance| Cooling fan of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily Half One Year Year If there is any abnormal sound or vibration Visual, aural inspection and turn the fan with hand (turn off the power before operation) to see if it rotates smoothly { If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw { If there is any change of color due to overheating Change fan { Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Daily If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air intake or air outlet Visual inspection Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Half One Year Year { 6-11 Appendix A Specifications There are 115V, 230V and 460V models in the VFD-E series. For 115V models, it is 1-phase models. For 0.25 to 3HP of the 230V models, there are 1-phase/3-phase models. Refer to following specifications for details. Voltage Class 115V Class 002 004 007 Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1.0 0.6 1.6 1.0 2.5 1.6 4.2 Input Rating Output Rating Model Number VFD-XXXE Rated Output Capacity (kVA) Rated Output Current (A) Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz Carrier Frequency (kHz) 1-15 Single-phase Rated Input Current (A) 6 9 Rated Voltage/Frequency ± 10%(90~132 V) ± 5%(47~63 Hz) Voltage Tolerance Frequency Tolerance Cooling Method Natural Cooling Weight (kg) Fan Cooling 1.2 1.2 Voltage Class 1.2 230V Class 002 004 007 015 022 037 055 075 Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.0 1.6 2.9 4.2 6.5 9.5 12.5 Rated Output Current (A) Maximum Output Voltage (V) 1.6 2.5 4.2 7.5 11.0 17 25 33 Input Rating Output Rating Model Number VFD-XXXE 18 Single phase, 100-120V, 50/60Hz 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage Output Frequency (Hz) 0.1~600 Hz Carrier Frequency (kHz) Rated Input Current (A) 1-15 Single/3-phase 4.9/1.9 6.5/2.7 9.5/5.1 24/15 Single/3-phase 200-240 V, 50/60Hz Rated Voltage/Frequency 20.6 ± 10%(180~264 V) ± 5%(47~63 Hz) Voltage Tolerance Frequency Tolerance Cooling Method Weight (kg) 3-phase 15.7/9 1.1 Natural Cooling 1.1 1.1 *NOTE: the weight for VFD015E23P is 1.2kg. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 *1.2/1.9 1.9 26 34 3-phase 200-240V, 50/60Hz Fan Cooling 1.9 3.5 3.5 Appendix A Specifications| Voltage Class 004 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.4 6.8 9.9 13.7 18.3 Rated Output Current (A) 1.5 2.5 4.2 5.5 8.2 13 18 24 19 26 4.2 4.2 Input Rating Output Rating Model Number VFD-XXXE 460V Class Maximum Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage Output Frequency (Hz) Carrier Frequency (kHz) Rated Input Current (A) 0.1~600 Hz 1-15 3-phase 1.9 3.2 Rated Voltage/Frequency 4.3 11.2 14 ± 10%(342~528V) ± 5%(47~63Hz) Voltage Tolerance Frequency Tolerance Cooling Method Weight (kg) 7.1 3-phase, 380-480V, 50/60Hz Natural Cooling 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.9 Fan Cooling 1.9 4.2 General Specifications SPWM(Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation) control (V/f or sensorless vector control) Control System Frequency Setting Resolution Control Characteristics Output Frequency Resolution Torque Characteristics Overload Endurance Skip Frequency Accel/Decel Time 150% of rated current for 1 minute 0.1 to 600 seconds (2 Independent settings for Accel/Decel time) Stall Prevention Level Setting 20 to 250% of rated current Operation frequency 0.1-600.0Hz, output 0-100% rated current Start time 0-60 seconds, stop time 0-60 seconds DC Brake V/f Pattern Operating Characteristics 0.01Hz Including the auto-torque/auto-slip compensation; starting torque can be 150% at 3.0Hz Three zones, setting range 0.1-600Hz Regenerated Brake Torque A-2 0.01Hz Approx. 20% (up to 125% possible with optional brake resistor or externally mounted brake unit, 1-15hp (0.75-11kW) models have brake chopper built-in) 4-point adjustable V/f pattern Keypad Frequency Setting External Signal Operation Setting Signal External Signal Keypad Multi-function Input Signal Setting by Potentiometer-5kΩ/0.5W, 0 to +10VDC, 4 to 20mA, RS-485 interface; Multifunction Inputs 3 to 9 (15 steps, Jog, up/down) Set by RUN and STOP 2 wires/3 wires (MI1, MI2, MI3), JOG operation, RS-485 serial interface (MODBUS), programmable logic controller Multi-step selection 0 to 15, Jog, accel/decel inhibit, 2 accel/decel switches, counter, external Base Block, ACI/AVI selections, driver reset, UP/DOWN key settings, NPN/PNP input selection Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix A Specifications| General Specifications Multi-function Output Indication Analog Output Signal AC drive operating, frequency attained, zero speed, Base Block, fault indication, overheat alarm, emergency stop and status selections of input terminals Output frequency/current Alarm Output Contact Contact will be On when drive malfunctions (1 Form C/change-over contact and 1 open collector output) for standard type) Operation Functions Built-in PLC(NOT for CANopen models), AVR, accel/decel S-Curve, overvoltage/over-current stall prevention, 5 fault records, reverse inhibition, momentary power loss restart, DC brake, auto torque/slip compensation, auto tuning, adjustable carrier frequency, output frequency limits, parameter lock/reset, vector control, PID control, external counter, MODBUS communication, abnormal reset, abnormal re-start, power-saving, fan control, sleep/wake frequency, 1st/2nd frequency source selections, 1st/2nd frequency source combination, NPN/PNP selection, parameters for motor 0 to motor 3, DEB and OOB (Out Of Balance Detection)(for washing machine) Protection Functions Over voltage, over current, under voltage, external fault, overload, ground fault, overheating, electronic thermal, IGBT short circuit, PTC Display Keypad (optional) Built-in Brake Chopper Built-in EMI Filter 6-key, 7-segment LED with 4-digit, 5 status LEDs, master frequency, output frequency, output current, custom units, parameter values for setup and lock, faults, RUN, STOP, RESET, FWD/REV, PLC VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T, VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C, VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C For 230V 1-phase and 460V 3-phase models. Environmental Conditions Enclosure Rating IP20 Pollution Degree Installation Location Ambient Temperature 2 Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust -10oC to 50oC (40oC for side-by-side mounting) Non-Condensing and not frozen Storage/ Transportation Temperature -20 oC to 60 oC Ambient Humidity Vibration Below 90% RH (non-condensing) 9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz Approvals Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 A-3 Appendix A Specifications| This page intentionally left blank A-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors. The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference. 115V Series Voltage Refer to the “Brake unit Module User Manual” for further details. Applicable Motor hp kW 0.25 0.2 0.5 0.4 1 VFD002E11T VFD004E11A/11C/11P VFD004E11T 0.75 VFD007E11A/11C/11P 7.5 10 7.5 0.5 230V Series VFD002E11A/11C/11P VFD002E21A/21C/21P/23A 23C/23P VFD002E21T/23T VFD004E21A/21C/21P/23A 0.4 /23C/23P VFD004E21T/23T VFD007E21A/21C/21P/23A 0.75 /23C/23P VFD007E21T/23T VFD015E21A/21C 1.5 VFD015E23T VFD015E23A/23C/23P 2.2 VFD022E21A/21C/23A/23C 3.7 VFD037E23A/23C VFD055E23A/23C 5.5 0.25 1 2 3 5 0.2 VFD075E23A/23C 7.5 VFD004E43A/43C/43P VFD004E43T VFD007E43A/43C/43P 0.75 VFD007E43T VFD015E43A/43C 1.5 VFD015E43T 2.2 VFD022E43A/43C 3.7 VFD037E43A/43C VFD055E43A/43C 5.5 10 15 7.5 11 0.5 1 460V Series AC Drive Part No. 2 3 5 0.4 VFD075E43A/43C VFD110E43A/43C Full Equivalent Brake Unit Part Load Resistor Value No. and Torque (recommended) Quantity KG-M 0.110 0.216 0.427 0.110 200W 250Ω 200W 250Ω 0.216 0.427 0.849 1.262 2.080 3.111 4.148 6.186 1 343 BR200W250 1 343 200Ω BR200W250 1 170 100Ω 100Ω BR200W250 1 170 1 143 80Ω BR200W250 1 343 200Ω BR200W250 BR200W250 1 343 200Ω 1 170 100Ω 200W 250Ω 200W 250Ω 200W 150Ω 4.148 1 200Ω BR200W250 BR200W150 0.427 3.111 BUE-20015 Min. Equivalent Resistor Value for each AC Motor Drive 200W 250Ω 200W 250Ω 200W 250Ω 1.262 2.080 1 Brake Torque 10%ED 200W 150Ω 0.216 0.849 BUE-20015 200W 250Ω Brake Resistors Part No. and Quantity 200W 150Ω 300W 85Ω 300W 85Ω 300W 85Ω 600W 50Ω 600W 50Ω 800W 37.5 Ω 1200W 25Ω 300W 400Ω 300W 400Ω 300W 400Ω 300W 400Ω 400W 300Ω 400W 300Ω 600W 200Ω 900W 133Ω 1200W 100 Ω 1500W 80Ω 2100W 57Ω Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 BUE-20015 1 BUE-20015 1 BUE-20015 1 BUE-20015 1 BUE-40015 1 BUE-40015 1 BUE-40015 1 BR200W250 1 170 100Ω BR200W150 1 143 80Ω BR200W150 BR300W100 BR300W100 BR300W100 BR300W100 BR300W100 1 1 1 1 2 2 143 107 107 107 143 85 80Ω 40Ω 80Ω 80Ω 40Ω 40Ω BR200W150 4 76 34Ω BR300W100 4 85 24Ω BR300W400 BR300W400 BR300W400 BR300W400 BR200W150 BR200W150 BR300W400 BR300W400 BR300W400 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 428 428 214 214 143 143 143 129 115 400Ω 400Ω 200Ω 200Ω 160Ω 160Ω 140Ω 96Ω 96Ω BR300W400 BR300W400 5 7 107 100 69Ω 53Ω B-1 Appendix B Accessories| NOTE 1. Please select the brake unit and/or brake resistor according to the table. “-“ means no Delta product. Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value. 2. If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void. 3. 4. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the power in Watt. 5. Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch power off to the AC motor drive! 6. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the right-most column in the table). 7. Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to installation and operation. 8. Definition for Brake Usage ED% Explanation: The definition of the barking usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Suggest cycle time is one minute 100% Brake Time T1 Cycle Time 9. ED% = T1/T0x100(%) T0 For safety reasons, install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor. Together with the magnetic contactor (MC) in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers protection in case of any malfunctioning. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage. Under these circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive. Never let the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious damage to the AC Motor Drive. B-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| NFB MC R/L1 R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 S/L2 V/T2 IM T/L3 T/L3 W/T3 MOTOR VFD Series O.L. Thermal Overload Relay or temperature switch MC SA Surge Absorber + (P ) +(P ) - ( N) - ( N) B1 Thermal Overload Relay O.L. Brake Brake Unit BR Resistor B2 Temperature Switch Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit. Note2: Do NOT wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-3 Appendix B Accessories| B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors (Dimensions are in millimeter) Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400, BR400W150, BR400W040 Model no. BR080W200 BR080W750 L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g) 140 125 20 5.3 60 160 215 200 30 5.3 60 750 265 250 30 5.3 60 930 BR300W100 BR300W250 BR300W400 BR400W150 BR400W040 B-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075 Model no. L1 L2 H D W Max. Weight (g) 335 320 30 5.3 60 1100 400 385 50 5.3 100 2800 BR500W030 BR500W100 BR1KW020 BR1KW075 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-5 Appendix B Accessories| Order P/N: BR1K0W050 Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040 B-6 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Order P/N: BR200W150, BR200W250 Model no. L1±2 L2±2 L3±2 W±1 H±1 165 150 110 30 60 BR200W150 BR200W250 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-7 Appendix B Accessories| B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart For 1-phase/3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be greater than 2 X (rated input current). 1-phase Model B-8 3-phase Recommended no-fuse breaker (A) Model Recommended no-fuse breaker (A) VFD002E11A/11T/11C/ 11P 15 VFD002E23A/23C/23T/ 23P 5 VFD002E21A/21T/21C/ 21P 10 VFD004E23A/23C/23T/ 23P 5 VFD004E11A/11C/11T/ 11P 20 VFD004E43A/43C/43T/ 43P 5 VFD004E21A/21C/21T/ 21P 15 VFD007E23A/23C/23T/ 23P 10 VFD007E11A/11C 30 VFD007E43A/43C/43T/ 43P 5 VFD007E21A/21C/21T/ 21P 20 VFD015E23A/23C/23T/ 23P 20 VFD015E21A/21C 30 VFD015E43A/43C/43T 10 VFD022E21A/21C 50 VFD022E23A/23C 30 VFD022E43A/43C 15 VFD037E23A/23C 40 VFD037E43A/43C 20 VFD055E23A/23C 50 VFD055E43A/43C 30 VFD075E23A/23C 60 VFD075E43A/43C 40 VFD110E43A/43C 50 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.3 Fuse Specification Chart Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted. Line Fuse I (A) I (A) Input Output I (A) Bussmann P/N VFD002E11A/11T/11C/ 11P 6 1.6 15 JJN-15 VFD002E21A/21T/21C /21P 4.9 1.6 10 JJN-10 VFD002E23A/23C/23T /23P 1.9 1.6 5 JJN-6 VFD004E11A/11C/11T/ 11P 9 2.5 20 JJN-20 VFD004E21A/21C/21T /21P 6.5 2.5 15 JJN-15 VFD004E23A/23C/23T /23P 2.7 2.5 5 JJN-6 VFD004E43A/43C/43T /43P 1.9 1.5 5 JJS-6 VFD007E11A/11C 18 4.2 30 JJN-30 VFD007E21A/21C/21T /21P 9.7 4.2 20 JJN-20 VFD007E23A/23C/23T /23P 5.1 4.2 10 JJN-10 VFD007E43A/43C/43T /43P 3.2 2.5 5 JJS-6 Model VFD015E21A/21C 15.7 7.5 30 JJN-30 VFD015E23A/23C/23T /23P 9 7.5 20 JJN-20 VFD015E43A/43C/43T 4.3 4.2 10 JJS-10 VFD022E21A/21C 24 11 50 JJN-50 VFD022E23A/23C 15 11 30 JJN-30 VFD022E43A/43C 7.1 5.5 15 JJS-15 VFD037E23A/23C 20.6 17 40 JJN-40 VFD037E43A/43C 11.2 8.2 20 JJS-20 VFD055E23A/23C 26 25 50 JJN-50 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-9 Appendix B Accessories| Line Fuse I (A) I (A) Input Output I (A) VFD055E43A/43C 14 13 30 JJS-30 VFD075E23A/23C 34 33 60 JJN-60 VFD075E43A/43C 19 18 40 JJS-40 VFD110E43A/43C 26 24 50 JJS-50 Model Bussmann P/N B.4 AC Reactor B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value 230V, 50/60Hz, 1-Phase kW HP Fundamental Amps 0.2 1/4 0.4 1/2 0.75 Inductance (mH) Max. continuous Amps 3~5% impedance 4 6 6.5 5 7.5 3 1 8 12 1.5 1.5 2 12 18 1.25 2.2 3 18 27 0.8 460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase B-10 Inductance (mH) kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance 0.4 1/2 2 3 20 32 0.75 1 4 6 9 12 1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9 2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5 3.7 5.5 5 7.5 8 12 12 18 3 2.5 5 4.2 7.5 10 18 27 1.5 2.5 11 15 25 37.5 1.2 2 15 20 35 52.5 0.8 1.2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value 115V/230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps 0.2 1/4 4 0.4 1/2 6 0.75 1 8 1.5 2 8 2.2 3 12 Inductance (mH) 3% impedance 5% impedance 4 9 12 6 6.5 9 12 3 5 12 1.5 3 18 1.25 2.5 3.7 5 18 27 0.8 1.5 5.5 7.5 25 37.5 0.5 1.2 7.5 10 35 52.5 0.4 0.8 460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase kW HP Fundamental Amps Max. continuous Amps Inductance (mH) 3% impedance 5% impedance 0.4 1/2 2 3 20 32 0.75 1 4 6 9 12 1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9 2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5 3.7 5 12 18 2.5 4.2 5.5 7.5 18 27 1.5 2.5 7.5 10 18 27 1.5 2.5 11 15 25 37.5 1.2 2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-11 Appendix B Accessories| B.4.3 Applications Connected in input circuit Application 1 Question When applying power to one of the AC motor When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power, and one drive, the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive of them is ON during operation. may be damaged when over current occurs during operation. Correct wiring M1 reactor AC motor drive motor AC motor drive motor AC motor drive motor M2 Mn Application 2 Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power. Question Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches on/off. These spikes may damage the mains circuit. Correct wiring Silicon Controlled Rectifier power reactor DC AC motor drive reactor motor B-12 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Application 3 Question Used to improve the input power factor, to reduce harmonics and provide protection from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.). The AC line reactor should be installed when the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the mains wiring distance ≤ 10m. When the mains power capacity is too large, line impedance will be small and the charge current will be too high. This may damage AC motor drive due to higher rectifier temperature. Correct wiring large-capacity power reactor small-capacity AC motor drive motor Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-13 Appendix B Accessories| B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch) Cable type (Note) Singlecore Threecore Recommended Wire Size AWG mm2 Nominal (mm2) ≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5 Qty. Wiring Method 1 Diagram A ≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38 4 Diagram B ≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5 1 Diagram A ≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50 4 Diagram B Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable. Diagram A Please wind each wire 4 times around the core. The reactor must be put at inverter output as close as possible. Zero Phase Reactor Power Supply B-14 R/L1 Diagram B Please put all wires through 4 cores in series without winding. Zero Phase Reactor Power Supply R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 MOTOR Note 1: The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors but the selection is ultimately governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable must fit through the center hole of zero phase reactors. Note 2: Only the phase conductors should pass through, not the earth core or screen. Note 3: When long motor output cables are used an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated emissions from the cable. U/T1 S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 MOTOR Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.6 Remote Controller RC-01 Dimensions are in millimeter 8 6 5 4 16 15 14 13 11 RC-01Terminal block (Wiring connections) AFM ACM AVI +10V DCM MI5 MI1 MI2 MI6 VFD-E I/O block VFD-E Programming: Pr.02.00 set to 2 Pr.02.01 set to 1 (external controls) Pr.04.04 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls) Pr.04.07 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset) Pr.04.08 (MI6) set to 8 (JOG operation) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-15 Appendix B Accessories| B.7 PU06 B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06 LED Display Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user defined units, read, and save, etc. Frequency Command Status indicator Output Frequency Status indicator F H U Model Number VFD-PU06 User Defined Units Status indicator EXT PU JOG By pressing JOG key, Jog frequency operation. UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency. Status Display Display the driver's current status. MODE JOG PU Left Key Change between different display mode. Right key Move cursor to the left. Move the cursor to the right FWD/REV Key Select FWD/REV operation. RUN STOP RESET STOP/RESET Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred. RUN Key Start AC drive operation. B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message Display Message Descriptions The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command. The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U, V, and W. The custom unit (u) The output current present at terminals U, V, and W. Press to change the mode to READ. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, read the parameters of AC drive to the digital keypad PU06. It can read 4 groups of parameters to PU06. (read 0 – read 3) Press to change the mode to SAVE. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, then write the parameters from the digital keypad PU06 to AC drive. If it has saved, it will show the type of AC motor drive. B-16 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Display Message Descriptions The specified parameter setting. The actual value stored in the specified parameter. External Fault “End” displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the or keys. “Err” displays if the input is invalid. Communication Error. Please check the AC motor drive user manual (Chapter 5, Group 9 Communication Parameter) for more details. B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart VFD-PU06 Operation Flow Chart Or XX Press UP key to select SAVE or READ. Press PROG/DATA for about 2 seconds or until it is flashing, then save parameters from PU06 to AC drive or read parameters from AC drive to PU06. XX-XX XXXXX -ERRCannot write in Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 -ENDSucceed to Write in B-17 Appendix B Accessories| B.8 KPE-LE02 B.8.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE-LE02 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 1 Status Display Display the driver's current status. 2 LED Display Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user defined units and etc. 8 5 UP and DOWN Key Set the parameter number and changes the numerical data, such as Master Frequency. 6 MODE Change between different display mode. 3 Potentiometer For master Frequency setting. 7 STOP/RESET 4 RUN Key 8 ENTER Used to enter/modify programming parameters Start AC drive operation. Display Message Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive after fault occurred. Descriptions Displays the AC drive Master Frequency. Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00.05) Displays the output current at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Displays the AC motor drive forward run status. Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status. The counter value (C). Displays the selected parameter. B-18 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Display Message Descriptions Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter. External Fault. Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by pressing key. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the and keys. Display “Err”, if the input is invalid. NOTE When the setting exceeds 99.99 for those numbers with 2 decimals (i.e. unit is 0.01), it will only display 1 decimal due to 4-digital display. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-19 Appendix B Accessories| B.8.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad Setting Mode START GO STA RT NOTE: In the selection mode, press to set the parameters. Setting parameters or Success to set parameter. NOTE:In the parameter setting mode, you can press Input data error to return the selecting mode. To shift data Setting direction (When operation source is digital keypad) Setting PLC Mode enter PLC2 mode enter PLC1 mode B-20 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.8.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b Cc d E F G Hh Ii Jj K L n Oo P q r S Tt U v Y Z LED Display English alphabet LED Display English alphabet LED Display English alphabet LED Display Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-21 Appendix B Accessories| B.9 Extension Card For details, please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download from our website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/. Installation method B.9.1 Relay Card B-22 EME-R2CA Relay Output EME-R3AA Relay Output Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.9.2 Digital I/O Card EME-D33A B.9.3 Analog I/O Card EME-A22A B.9.4 Communication Card CME-USB01 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-23 Appendix B Accessories| connect to extension card connect to PC B.9.5 Speed Feedback Card EME-PG01 B.10 Fieldbus Modules B.10.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01) B.10.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions 1. For RS-485 connection to VFD-E 2. Communication port for connecting DeviceNet network 3. Address selector 4. Baud rate selector 5. Three LED status indicators for monitor. (Refer to the figure below) B-24 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| 3 4 125K 5 250K NETMOD SP CME-DN01 2 57.3 [2.26] 14.3 [0.57] 59.7 [2.35] 500K ADD1 ADD2 BAUD 72.2 [2.84] 1 35.8 [1.41] 3.5 [0.14] UNIT: mm(inch) B.10.1.2 Wiring and Settings Refer to following diagram for details. MAC address Date Rate 125K Setting baud rate 0 250K 500K ADD1 ADD2 BAUD Setting MAC addresses: use decimal system. NET MOD SP CME-DN01 BAUD 1: Reserved 2: EV 3: GND 4: SG5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved V+ CAN-H Empty CAN-L Pin Switch Value Baud Rate 0 125K 1 250K 2 500K Other AUTO V- ADD1 ADD2 B.10.1.3 Mounting Method Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto VFD-E. The dimension on the left hand side is for your reference. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-25 Appendix B Accessories| Dimensions STEP 1 STEP 2 UNIT: mm(inch) B.10.1.4 Power Supply No external power is needed. Power is supplied via RS-485 port that is connected to VFD-E. An 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with this communication module, is used to connect the RS-485 port between VFD-E and this communication module for power. This communication module will perform the function once it is connected. Refer to the following paragraph for LED indications. B.10.1.5 LEDs Display 1. SP: Green LED means in normal condition, Red LED means abnormal condition. 2. Module: Green blinking LED means no I/O data transmission, Green steady LED means I/O data transmission OK. Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal. 3. Network: Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal, Red LED means abnormal NOTE Refer to user manual for detail information-- Chapter 5 Troubleshooting. B.10.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01) B-26 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.10.2.1 Introduction Device CME-LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk. CMELW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first, so that it can perform the function on LonWorks network. No need to set CME-LW01 address. This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME-LW01 that is used to communicate with Delta VFD-E (firmware version of VFD-E should conform with CME-LW01 according to the table below) via LonWorks Network. B.10.2.2 Dimensions SP CME-LW 01 57.3 [2.26] 59.7 [2.35] 9.5 [0.37] 72.2 [2.84] 34.8 [1.37] 3.5 [0.14] B.10.2.3 Specifications Power supply: 16-30VDC, 750mW Communication: Modbus in ASCII format, protocol: 9600, 7, N, 2 LonTalk: free topology with FTT-10A 78 Kbps. LonTalk terminal: 4-pin terminals, wire gauge: 28-12 AWG, wire strip length: 7-8mm RS-485 port: 8 pins with RJ-45 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-27 Appendix B Accessories| B.10.2.4 Wiring Service LED Power LED SP LED Service Pin SP CME-LW 01 1: Reserved 2: EV 3: GND 4: SG- 5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 1 2 3 4 LonTalk LonTalk Terminal definition for LonTalk system Terminal Symbol 1 2 3 Function These are twisted pair cables to connect to LonTalk system. Terminals 1 and 2 should be used as one group, and the same for terminals 3 and 4. 4 B.10.2.5 LED Indications There are three LEDs in front panel of CME-LW01. If the communication is normal, power LED, SP LED should be green (red LED means abnormal communication) and service LED should be OFF. If LEDs display do not match, refer to user manual for details. B.10.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01) B-28 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.10.3.1 Panel Appearance Address Switches NET LED SP LED ADDH AD DL N ET SP CME-P B01 RS-485 (RJ45) 1: Reserved 2: EV 3: GND 4: SG5: SG+ 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved Profibus-DP Interface (DB9) 1. SP LED: Indicating the connection status between VFD-E and CME-PD01. 2. NET LED: Indicating the connection status between CME-PD01 and PROFIBUS-DP. 3. Address Switches: Setting the address of CME-PD01 on PROFIBUS- DP network. 4. RS-485 Interface (RJ45): Connecting to VFD-E, and supply power to CME-PD01. 5. PROFIBUS-DP Interface (DB9): 9-PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network. 6. Extended Socket: 4-PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-29 Appendix B Accessories| B.10.3.2 Dimensions ADDH A DDL NET SP CME-P B01 57.3 [2.26] 59.7 [2.35] 3.6 [0.14] 72.2 [2.84] 34.8 [1.37] UNIT: mm(inch) B.10.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-E VFD-E Baud Rate 9600 Pr.09.01=1 RTU 8, N, 2 Pr.09.04=3 Freq. Source Pr.02.00=4 Command Source Pr.02.01=3 B.10.3.4 Power Supply The power of CME-PD01 is supplied from VFD-E. Please connect VFD-E to CME-PD01 by using 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with CME-PD01. After connection is completed, CME-PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD-E. B.10.3.5 PROFIBUS Address CME-PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address. The set value via 2 address switches, ADDH and ADDL, is in HEX format. ADDH sets the upper 4 bits, and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address. B-30 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Address Meaning 1..0x7D Valid PROFIBUS address 0 or 0x7E..0xFE Invalid PROFIBUS address B.10.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen) CME-COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen communication module of Delta VFD-E AC motor drive. B.10.4.1 Product Profile 7 6 3 4 5 2 c COM port d CANopen connection port e RUN indicator f ERROR indicator g SP (Scan Port) indicator h Baud rate switch i Address switch 1 Unit: mm B.10.4.2 Specifications CANopen Connection Interface Pluggable connector (5.08mm) Transmission method CAN Transmission cable 2-wire twisted shielded cable Electrical isolation 500V DC Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-31 Appendix B Accessories| Communication Process Data Objects (PDO) Service Data Object (SDO) Baud Message type Synchronization rate (SYNC) Emergency (EMCY) Network Management (NMT) Product code Delta VFD-E AC motor drive 22 Device type 402 Vendor ID 477 10 Kbps 20 Kbps 50 Kbps 125 Kbps 250 Kbps 500 Kbps 800 Kbps 1 Mbps Environmental Specifications ESD(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge EFT(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV, Noise Immunity Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV RS(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m Operation: 0°C ~ 55°C (Temperature), 50 ~ 95% (Humidity), Pollution Environment degree 2; Storage: -40°C ~ 70°C (Temperature), 5 ~ 95% (Humidity) Vibration / Standard: IEC1131-2, IEC 68-2-6(TEST Fc/IEC1131-2 & IEC 68-2-27 Shock (TEST Ea) Resistance Certifications Standard: IEC 61131-2,UL508 B.10.4.3 Components Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port To connect with CANopen, use the connector enclosed with CME-COP01 or any connectors you can buy in the store for wiring. Pin Signal Content 1 CAN_GND Ground / 0 V / V- 2 CAN_L Signal- 3 SHIELD Shield 4 CAN_H Signal+ 5 - Reserved 1 2 3 4 5 Baud Rate Setting 789 BCD 345 6 A 012 EF Rotary switch (BR) sets up the communication speed on CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 0 ~ 7 (8 ~F are forbidden) BR B-32 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Example: If you need to set up the communication speed of CME-COP01 as 500K, simply switch BR to “5”. BR Value Baud rate BR Value Baud rate 0 10K 4 250K 1 20K 5 500K 2 50K 6 800K 3 125K 7 1M MAC ID Setting 789 BCD 345 6 BCD 345 789 A 6 A 012 EF 012 EF Rotary switches (ID_L and ID_H) set up the Node-ID on CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 00 ~ 7F (80 ~FF are forbidden) ID_H ID_L Example: If you need to set up the communication address of CME-COP01 as 26(1AH), simply switch ID_H to “1” and ID_L to “A”. Switch Setting Content 0 … 7F Valid CANopen MAC ID setting Other Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting B.10.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting There are 3 LED indicators, RUN, ERROR and SP, on CME-COP01 to indicate the communication status of CME-COP01. RUN LED LED Status State Indication OFF No power No power on CME-COP01 card Single Flash (Green) STOPPED CME-COP01 is in STOPPED state Blinking (Green) PRE-OPERATIONAL CME-COP01 is in the PREOPERATIONAL state Green ON OPERATIONAL CME-COP01 is in the OPERATIONAL state Red ON Configuration error Node-ID or Baud rate setting error Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-33 Appendix B Accessories| ERROR LED LED Status OFF Single Flash (Red) Double Flash (Red) Red ON State Indication No error CME-COP01 is working condition Warning limit reached At least one of error counter of the CANopen controller has reached or exceeded the warning level (too many error frames) Error control event A guard event or heartbeat event has occurred Bus-off The CANopen controller is bus-off SP LED LED Status State Indication OFF No Power No power on CME-COP01 card LED Blinking (Red) CRC check error Check your communication setting in VFD-E drives (19200,<8,N,2>,RTU) Red ON Connection failure/No connection 1. Check the connection between VFD-E drive and CME-COP01 card is correct 2. Re-wire the VFD-E connection and ensure that the wire specification is correct LED Blinking (Green) CME-COP01 returns error code Check the PLC program, ensure the index and sub-index is correct Green ON Normal Communication is normal LED Descriptions State B-34 Description LED ON Constantly on LED OFF Constantly off LED blinking Flash, on for 0.2s and off for 0.2s LED single flash On for 0.2s and off for 1s LED double flash On for 0.2s off for 0.2s, on for 0.2s and off for 1s Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| B.11 DIN Rail B.11.1 MKE-DRA Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-35 Appendix B Accessories| B.11.2 MKE-DRB B.11.3 MKE-EP EMC earthing plate for Shielding Cable C CLAMP B-36 TWO HOLE STRAP 1 TWO HOLE STRAP 2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix B Accessories| Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 B-37 Appendix B Accessories| This page intentionally left blank B-38 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading. But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions, including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, depending on your requirements. Related Specification Item Friction load and weight load Liquid (viscous) load Load type Inertia load Load with power transmission Constant torque Load speed and Constant output torque Decreasing torque characteristics Decreasing output Constant load Shock load Load Repetitive load characteristics High starting torque Low starting torque Continuous operation, Short-time operation Long-time operation at medium/low speeds Maximum output current (instantaneous) Constant output current (continuous) Maximum frequency, Base frequency Power supply transformer capacity or percentage impedance Voltage fluctuations and unbalance Number of phases, single phase protection Frequency Mechanical friction, losses in wiring Duty cycle modification Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Speed and torque characteristics Time ratings Overload capacity ● Starting torque ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C-1 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| C.1 Capacity Formulas 1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity= ⎛ k×N GD 2 N ⎞ ⎜ TL + × ⎟ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive ( kVA) 973 × η × cos ϕ ⎜⎝ 375 t A ⎟⎠ 2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor 2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive Acceleration time ≦60 seconds The starting capacity= k×N η × cos ϕ [n T ⎡ + ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 + ⎢⎣ ⎤ ns (ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA) ⎥⎦ nT Acceleration time ≧60 seconds The starting capacity= k×N η × cos ϕ [n T ⎡ + ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 + ⎢⎣ ⎤ ns (ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA) ⎥⎦ nT 2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A) Acceleration time ≦60 seconds nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ 1.5 × the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A) Acceleration time ≧60 seconds nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A) C-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| 2.3 When it is running continuously The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA) The requirement of load capacity= k × PM η × cosϕ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA) The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive k × 3 × VM × IM × 10−3 ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA) The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A) k × IM ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A) Symbol explanation PM : Motor shaft output for load (kW) η : Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85) cos ϕ : Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75) VM : Motor rated voltage(V) IM : Motor rated current(A), for commercial power k : Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on PWM method) PC1 : Continuous motor capacity (kVA) kS : Starting current/rated current of motor nT nS : Number of motors in parallel GD : Number of simultaneously started motors 2 : Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2) TL : Load torque tA : Motor acceleration time N : Motor speed Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 C-3 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| C.2 General Precaution Selection Note 1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency. 2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated currents). 3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L. (Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive. 4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor. Parameter Settings Note 1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended. 2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is recommended. 3. 4. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the C-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive. C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following precautions: 1. 2. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling. 3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be decreased. 4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows: Load duty-cycle 25% 100 40% 60% torque(%) 82 70 60 50 0 5. continuous 3 6 20 Frequency (Hz) 60 If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special inverter duty motor. 6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 C-5 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| 7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected. 8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the following motor vibration problems: Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed. Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher frequency. To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies. 9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz. Special motors: 1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor: The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast). 2. Submersible motor: The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced. 3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor: Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions. 4. Gear reduction motor: The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully. 5. Synchronous motor: The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC C-6 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing the motor. Power Transmission Mechanism Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur. Motor torque The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power are different. Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW): AC motor drive Motor 180 60 seconds 155 140 100 80 55 38 03 20 180 150 torque (%) torque (%) 45 35 03 20 50 120 Frequency (Hz) Base freq.: 50Hz V/F for 220V/50Hz Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 55 38 60 120 Frequency (Hz) Base freq.: 60Hz V/F for 220V/60Hz 60 seconds 100 85 68 100 0 3 20 60 120 Frequency (Hz) Base freq.: 60Hz V/F for 220V/60Hz 140 130 60 seconds 155 torque (%) torque (%) 180 60 seconds 100 80 45 35 0 3 20 50 120 Frequency (Hz) Base freq.: 50Hz V/F for 220V/50Hz C-7 Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive| This page intentionally left blank. C-8 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function ※ This function is NOT for VFD*E*C models. D.1 PLC Overview D.1.1 Introduction The PLC function built in the VFD-E provides following commands: WPLSoft, basic commands and application commands. The operation methods are the same as Delta DVPPLC series. D.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and VFD-E series for WINDOWS. Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy, multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file saving, and contacts monitor and set, etc.). Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft: Item System Requirement Operation System Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP CPU Pentium 90 and above Memory 16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended) Hard Disk Capacity: 50MB and above CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft) Monitor Resolution: 640×480, 16 colors and above, It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800×600. Mouse General mouse or the device compatible with Windows Printer Printer with Windows driver RS-232 port At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC Applicable Models All Delta DVP-PLC series and VFD-E series Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-1 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.2 Start-up D.2.1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC function by the following five steps. 1. Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download/upload: A. Go to “PLC0” page by pressing the MODE key B. Change to “PLC2” by pressing the “UP” key and then press the “ENTER” key after confirmation C. If succeeded, “END” is displayed and back to “PLC2” after one or two seconds. Disable Run PLC Read/write PLC program into AC drives NOTE You don’t need to care about the PLC warning, such as PLod, PLSv and PldA, before downloading a program to VFD-E. 2. Connection: Please connect RJ-45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485-to-RS232 converter. RS485 3. Run the program. The PLC status will always be PLC2, even if the AC motor drive is switched off. There are three ways to operate PLC: A. In “PLC1” page: execute PLC program. B. In “PLC2” page: execute/stop PLC program by using WPL software. C. After setting multi-function input terminals (MI3 to MI9) to 23 (RUN/STOP PLC), it will display “PLC1” for executing PLC when the terminal is ON. It will display “PLC0” to stop PLC program when terminals are OFF. NOTE When external terminals are set to 23 and the terminal is ON, it cannot use keypad to change PLC mode. Moreover, when it is PLC2, you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals. D-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| NOTE When power on after power off, the PLC status will be in “PLC1”. 4. When you are in “PLC2”, please remember to change to “PLC1” when finished to prevent anyone modifying PLC program. NOTE When output/input terminals (MI1~MI9, Relay1~Relay 4, MO1~MO4) are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places. For example, When Y0 in PLC program is activated, the corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this moment, parameter 03.00 setting will be invalid. Because the terminal has been used by PLC. NOTE The PLC corresponding input points for MI1 to MI6 are X0 to X5. When extension card are added, the extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in chapter D.2.2. D.2.2 Device Reference Table Device X ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 Terminals of AC Drives MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 -- -- -- 3IN/3OUT Card (EME-D33A) -- -- -- -- -- -- MI7 MI8 MI9 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-3 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Device ID Terminals of AC Drives Relay Card-2C (EME-DR2CA) Relay Card-3A (EME-R3AA) 3IN/3OUT Card (EME-D33A) 0 1 Y 2 3 4 RY MO1 -- -- -- -- -- RY2 RY3 -- -- -- RY2 RY3 RY4 -- -- MO2 MO3 MO4 D.2.3 WPLSoft Installation Download PLC program to AC drive: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for writing program and download the editor (WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/plc/plc_software.asp. D-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.2.4 Program Input D.2.5 Program Download Please do following steps for program download. Step 1. Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft. Step 2. After finishing compiler, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items. After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the communication format. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-5 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.2.6 Program Monitor If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder diagram will be shown as follows. D.2.7 The Limit of PLC 1. The protocol of PLC is 7,E,1 2. Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload/download. 3. The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ > WPR. 4. When setting P 00.04 to 2, the display will be the value in PLC register D1043. A. B. 0 ~ 999 display: 1000 ~ 9999 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The LED at the bottom-right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value. For example, the actual value for the following figure is 100X10=1000. C. 10000~65535 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The LED at the bottom-right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the right-most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value. For example, the actual value for the following figure is 100X100=10000. D-6 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| 5. When it is changed to “PLC2”, RS-485 will be used by PLC. 6. When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode, the function to reset all parameters to factory setting is disabled (i.e. Pr.00.02 can’t be set to 9 or 10). Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-7 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.3 Ladder Diagram D.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Read input state from outside X0 X1 Start Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn’t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately.) Y0 Y0 M100 X3 X10 Y1 Execute in cycles : : X100 M505 Y126 End Send the result to the output point D.3.2 Introduction Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc. The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF. You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a). Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, such as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could D-8 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| use byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times. In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word. Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC: Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly. If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can’t be used with other functions. Equipment indication method: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,…. The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal. Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay. Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…. . The symbol of equipment is Y and the number uses octal. Internal relay The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output directly, it should output with output point. Equipment indication: M0, M1,…, M4, M159. The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system. Timer Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period. Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero. Equipment indication: T0, T1,…,T15. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period. Counter Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter. When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use. Equipment indication: C0, C1,…,C7. The symbol of equipment is C and the number uses decimal. Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-9 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words. Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D29. The symbol of equipment is D and the number uses decimal. The structure and explanation of ladder diagram: Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, T, C Normally closed, contact b LDI X, Y, M, T, C AND X, Y, M, T, C Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, T, C Parallel normally closed ORI X, Y, M, T, C Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, T, C Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, T, C Rising-edge trigger in serial ANDP X, Y, M, T, C Falling-edge trigger in serial ANDF X, Y, M, T, C Rising-edge trigger in parallel ORP X, Y, M, T, C Falling-edge trigger in parallel ORF X, Y, M, T, C Block in serial ANB none Block in parallel ORB none Serial normally open D-10 Equipment Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment MPS Multiple output MRD none MPP Output command of coil drive Basic command, Application command OUT Y, M, S Please refer to Application basic command command and application command Inverse logic INV none D.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows. X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1 X11 X12 X13 00000 Y0 00000 Row Number The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram. Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is the explanation order. X0 X1 Y1 X4 T0 M3 Y1 M0 TMR X3 T0 K10 M1 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| The explanation of command order: 1 LD X0 2 OR M0 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD T0 AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR T0 K10 The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram 1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block. LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following. Rising-edge Falling-edge X0 X0 Time OFF 2. D-12 ON OFF Time OFF ON OFF AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series. AND command AND command Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or fallingedge. 3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block. OR command OR command OR command The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge. 4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series. ANB command 5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel. ORB command If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right. 6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs. 7. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”. 8. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-13 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”. 9. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending. MPS You can recognize this command by the symbol MPS “└”. Basically, that is all right to use the above MRD method to analyze but sometimes compiler will MPP omit the same outputs as shown at the right. MPP D.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program Start, Stop and Latching In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are several latching circuits in the following: Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop Y1 When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally contact X2=Off, and Y1=On are set at the same time, if X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop X2 Y1 X1 acting. Therefore, it calls priority of stop. Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start X1 When start normally open contact X1=On, stop Y1 normally contact X2=Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid at the same time, if X2 Y1 X2=On, coil Y1 will be active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start. D-14 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made Top priority of stop X1 up of RST and SET command. SET Y1 RST Y1 X2 It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind SET command. When executing PLC from up to down, The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls Top priority of start X2 priority of stop. It is top priority of start when SET command is set after RST Y1 SET Y1 X1 RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start. The common control circuit Example 4: condition control X1 X3 Y1 X1 X3 Y1 X2 X2 X4 Y1 Y2 Y2 X4 Y1 Y2 X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-15 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Example 5: Interlock control X1 X3 Y2 Y1 X1 X3 Y1 X2 X4 X2 X4 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y2 The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won’t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2 won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2. Example 6: Sequential Control X1 X3 Y2 Y1 Y1 X2 If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left side) Y1 is an X4 input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting. Y1 Y2 Y2 In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential. Example 7: Oscillating Circuit The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT Y1 Y1 Y1 T T The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF. The result of repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle timeΔ T(On)+ΔT(Off). D-16 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT(On)+ΔT(Off): X0 Y1 TMR T0 Kn X0 T0 Y1 Y1 nT T The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period)) Example 8: Blinking Circuit X0 T2 TMR T1 Kn1 TMR T2 Kn2 X0 n2 *T T1 X0 T1 Y1 Y1 n1 * T The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer (clock period) Example 9: Triggered Circuit X0 M0 M0 Y1 M0 X0 Y1 Y1 T M0 Y1 In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-17 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Example 10: Delay Circuit X0 TMR T10 X0 K1000 T10 Y1 Y1 TB = 0.1 sec 100 seconds When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON. Please refer to timing chart above. Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay. X0 TMR T5 T5 K50 T6 Y4 X0 5 seconds T5 Y4 Y4 Y0 X0 TMR T6 K30 T6 3 seconds Example12: Extend Timer Circuit X0 TMR T11 Kn1 TMR T12 Kn2 T11 T12 Y1 In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is clock period. X0 n1* T T11 n2* T T12 Y1 (n1+n2)* T D-18 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.4 PLC Devices D.4.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number Items Specifications Remarks Control Method Stored program, cyclic scan system I/O Processing Method Batch processing (when END I/O refresh instruction is instruction is executed) available Execution Speed Basic commands (minimum 0.24 us) Application commands (10 ~ hundreds us) Program Language Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC Including the Step commands Program Capacity 500 STEPS SRAM + Battery Commands 45 commands Input/Output Contact Input (X): 6, output (Y): 2 28 basic commands X External Input Relay Y External Output Relay Relay bit mode T X0~X17, 16 points, octal number system Total is 32 Y0~Y17, 16 points, points octal number system For general M0~M159, 160 points For special M1000~M1031, 32 points M Auxiliary Timer 100ms timer 16-bit count up for general 32-bit C Counter count up/down highspeed counter T0~T15, 16 points C0~C7, 8 points 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 17 application commands C235, 1 point (need to use with PG card) Correspond to external input point Correspond to external output point Total is Contacts can switch to 192 On/Off in program points When the timer Total is indicated by TMR command attains the 16 setting, the T contact points with the same number will be On. Total is 8 points When the counter indicated by CNT command attains the Total is setting, the C contact with the same number 1 point will be On. 2-phase 2 inputs Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-19 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Constant Register WORD data Items Specifications Remarks When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On. T Present value of timer T0~T15, 16 points C Present value of counter When timer attains, the C0~C7, 8-bit counter, 8 points contact of timer will be On. D Data register For latched D0~D9, 10 points For general D10~D29, 20 points For special D1000~D1044, 45 points Total is It can be memory area 75 for storing data. points K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) Communication port (for read/write program) RS485 (slave) Analog input/output Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Function extension module (optional) Digital input/output card (A/D, D/A card) D.4.2 Devices Functions The Function of Input/output Contacts The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft). The Function of Output Contact Y The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method. D-20 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| X0 The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit 1 Y0 2 , i.e. decided by On/Off of X10. ○ Y0 is repeated X10 2 Y0 D.4.3 Value, Constant [K] / [H] K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) Constant There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the explanation of value types. 1. Binary Number (BIN) It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the following. Bit : Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0. Nibble : It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal. Byte : It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system. Word : It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system. Double Word : It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system. The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows. DW Double Word W1 W0 BY3 NB7 BY2 NB6 NB5 Word BY1 NB4 NB3 BY0 NB2 NB1 Byte NB0 Nibble Bit 2. Octal Number (OCT) The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number. Example: External input: X0~X7, X10~X17…(device number) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-21 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17…(device number) 3. Decimal Number (DEC) The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system. To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant) To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number) To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant) 4. BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD) It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7-segment display to be display. 5. Hexadecimal Number (HEX) The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system. To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H) Constant K: In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in decimal number. Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately. Constant H: In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number. D.4.4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly. There are two types divided by its characteristics. 1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its state will be Off when power on after power loss. 2. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please don’t use undefined auxiliary relay. D.4.5 The Function of Timer The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as settings. The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings D-22 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.4.6 The Features and Functions of Counter Features: Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up/down Settings 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 Designate for constant Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated) Present value change Counter will stop when attaining settings Output contact When count attains settings, contact will be On and latched. Reset action The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to Off. Present register 16 bits 32 bits Contact action After scanning, act together. After scanning, act together. Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings When count up attains settings, contact will be On and latched. When count down attains settings, contact will reset to Off. Act immediately when count attains. It has no relation with scan period. Functions: When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings. 16-bit counters C0~C7: 1. Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be On immediately at the first count. 2. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss. 3. If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings. 4. The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting. 5. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-23 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Example: LD X0 RST C0 LD X1 CNT C0 K5 LD C0 OUT Y0 X0 RST C0 CNT C0 X1 K5 C0 Y0 1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to Off. X0 X1 2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will count up (add 1). 3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 contact is On and C0 = setting =K5. C0 won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 remains K5. 5 4 C0 present value 3 settings 2 1 0 0 Contacts Y0, C0 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235: 1. Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is : K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. 2. The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1044 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data register. The total band width of high-speed counter that VFD-E supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse input. D.4.7 Register Types There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following: D-24 1. General register : The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or power is off. 2. Special register : Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system status, error messages, monitor state. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.4.8 Special Auxiliary Relays Special M Function Read(R)/ Write(W) M1000 Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is On when the status is set to RUN. R M1001 Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off in running and it is Off when the status is set to RUN. R M1002 On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period. R M1003 Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period. R M1004 Reserved -- M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives R M1006 Output frequency is 0 R M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: 0, REV: 1) R M1008 Reserved -- M1009 Reserved -- M1010 Reserved -- M1011 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off R M1012 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off R M1013 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off R M1014 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off R M1015 Frequency attained R M1016 Parameter read/write error R M1017 Succeed to write parameter R M1018 Enable high-speed counter function (When M1028=On) R M1019 Reserved R M1020 Zero flag R M1021 Borrow flag R M1022 Carry flag R M1023 Divisor is 0 R M1024 Reserved -- M1025 RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 R/W D-25 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Special M Read(R)/ Write(W) Function M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON) R/W M1027 Reserved M1028 Enable(ON)/disable(OFF) high-speed counter function R/W M1029 Clear the value of high-speed counter R/W M1030 Decide to count up(OFF)/count down(ON) R/W M1031 Reserved -- -- D.4.9 Special Registers Special D Function Read(R)/ Write(W) D1000 Reserved -- D1001 PLC firmware version R D1002 Program capacity R D1003 Checksum R D1004D1009 Reserved -- D1010 Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) R D1011 Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) R D1012 Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) R D1013D1019 Reserved -- D1020 Output frequency R D1021 Output current R The ID of the extension card: 02 USB Card 03 12-Bit A/D (2CH) 12-Bit D/A (2CH) D1022 04 Relay Card-2C R 05 Relay Card-3A 06 3IN/3OUT Card 07 PG Card D1023D1024 D-26 Reserved -- Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Special D Function Read(R)/ Write(W) D1025 The present value of the high-speed counter C235 (low byte) R D1026 The present value of the high-speed counter C235 (high byte) R D1027 Frequency command of the PID control R D1028 The value of AVI (analog voltage input) 0-10V corresponds to 01023 R D1029 The value of ACI (analog current input) 4-20mA corresponds to 01023 or the value of AVI2 (analog voltage input) 0-10V corresponds to 0-1023 R D1030 The value of V.R digital keypad 0-10V corresponds to 0-1023 R D1031D1035 Reserved -- D1036 PLC error code R D1037D1039 Reserved -- D1040 Analog output value D1041D1042 Reserved D1043 D1044 R/W -- User defined (when Pr.00.04 is set to 2, the register data will be displayed as C xxx) R/W High-speed counter mode R/W D.4.10 Communication Addresses for Devices (only for PLC2 mode) Device Range Type Address (Hex) X 00–17 (octal) Bit 0400-040F Y 00–17 (octal) Bit 0500-050F T 00-15 Bit/word 0600-060F M 000-159 Bit 0800-089F M 1000-1031 Bit 0BE8-0C07 C 0-7 Bit/word 0E00-0E07 D 00-63 Word 1000-101D D 1000-1044 Word 13E8-1414 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-27 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| NOTE: when it is in PLC1 mode, the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT the device. For example, address 0400H will correspond to Pr.04.00 NOT X0. D.4.11 Function Code (only for PLC2 mode) Function Code Description Supported Devices 01 Read coil status Y, M, T, C 02 Read input status X, Y, M, T, C 03 Read one data T, C, D 05 Force changing one coil status Y, M, T, C 06 Write in one data T, C, D 0F Force changing multiple coil status Y, M, T, C 10 Write in multiple data T, C, D D.5 Commands D.5.1 Basic Commands Commands D-28 Function Operands LD Load contact A X, Y, M, T, C LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, T, C AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, T, C OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, T, C ANB Series connects the circuit block -- ORB Parallel connects the circuit block -- MPS Save the operation result -- MRD Read the operation result (the pointer not moving) -- MPP Read the result -- INV Inverter the result -- Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.5.2 Output Commands Commands Function Operands OUT Drive coil Y, M SET Action latched (ON) Y, M RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, T, C, D D.5.3 Timer and Counters Commands Function Operands TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D D.5.4 Main Control Commands Commands MC MCR Function Operands Connect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 Disconnect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 D.5.5 Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact Commands Function Operands LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts X, Y, M, T, C LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts X, Y, M, T, C ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-29 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.5.6 Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands Commands Function Operands PLS Rising-edge output Y, M PLF Falling-edge output Y, M D.5.7 End Command Command Function Operands END Program end none D.5.8 Explanation for the Commands Mnemonic Function LD Load A contact Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- 9 Explanations: The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram X0 X1 Y1 Operation LD X0 Load contact A of X0 AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDI Load B contact Operand D-30 Command code X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Explanations: The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 X1 Y1 Command code: Operation: LDI X0 Load contact B of X0 AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function AND Series connection- A contact Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- Explanations: The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X1 X0 Y1 Command code: Operation: LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 AND X0 Connect to contact A of X0 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-31 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Mnemonic Function ANI Series connection- B contact Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- 9 Explanations: The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X1 X0 Y1 Command code: Operation: LD X1 Load contact A of X1 ANI X0 Connect to contact B of X0 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OR Parallel connection- A contact Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- Explanations: The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. D-32 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: X0 Y1 X1 Operation: LD X0 Load contact A of X0 OR X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORI Parallel connection- B contact Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- 9 Explanations: The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: X0 Y1 X1 Operation: LD X1 Load contact A of X0 ORI X1 Connect to contact B of X1 in parallel OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits) Operand None Explanations: To perform the “ANB” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-33 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 ANB X1 X2 Command code: Operation: Y1 X3 Block A Block B LD X0 Load contact A of X0 ORI X2 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel LDI X1 Load contact B of X1 OR X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel ANB Connect circuit block in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits) Operand None Explanations: To perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Operation: X1 Block A Y1 X2 X3 ORB Block B LD X0 Load contact A of X0 ANI X1 Connect to contact B of X1 in series LDI X2 Load contact B of X2 AND X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in series ORB OUT D-34 Connect circuit block in parallel Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Explanations: To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result operation pointer pluses 1) Mnemonic Function MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations: Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of operation result doesn’t move) Mnemonic Function MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Operand None Explanations: Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer will decrease 1) Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 MPS Command code: Operation: LD X1 Y1 X2 MRD M0 Y2 MPP END X0 MPS AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil MRD Read from the stack (without moving pointer) AND X2 Connect to contact A of X2 in series OUT M0 Drive M0 coil MPP OUT END Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Load contact A of X0 Save in stack Read from the stack Y2 Drive Y2 coil End program D-35 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Mnemonic Function INV Inverting Operation Operand None Explanations: Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 LD Y1 X0 Load A contact of X0 INV OUT Inverting the operation result Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function OUT Output coil Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 -- 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 -- -- -- 9 Explanations: Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device. Motion of coil contact OUT command Operation D-36 Contact result Coil FALSE OFF Non-continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non-continuity A contact (normally open) B contact (normally closed) Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Operation: X1 Y1 LDI X0 Load contact B of X0 AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function SET Latch (ON) Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 -- 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 -- -- -- 9 Explanations: When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will keep “ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set the device to “OFF”. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Y0 SET Y1 Operation: LD X0 Load contact A of X0 ANI Y0 Connect to contact B of Y0 in series SET Y1 Y1 latch (ON) Mnemonic Function RST Clear the contacts or the registers Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 -- 9 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- D-37 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Explanations: When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows: Device Status Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”. T, C Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and contact will be set to “OFF.” D The content value will be set to 0. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 RST Y5 LD X0 Load contact A of X0 RST Y5 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function TMR 16-bit timer Operand T-K T0~T15, K0~K32,767 T-D T0~T15, D0~D29 Explanations: When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the contact will be as following: NO(Normally Open) contact Open collector NC(Normally Closed) contact Close collector Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 TMR D-38 T5 K1000 Command code: Operation: LD X0 Load contact A of X0 T5 timer TMR T5 K1000 Setting is K1000 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Mnemonic Function CNT 16-bit counter C-K C0~C7, K0~K32,767 C-D C0~C7, D0~D29 Operand Explanations: 1. When the CNT command is executed from OFFÆON, which means that the counter coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact is as follows: 2. NO(Normally Open) contact Continuity NC(Normally Closed) contact Non-continuity If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use the RST command. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 CNT C20 K100 LD X0 Load contact A of X0 C2 counter CNT C2 K100 Setting is K100 Mnemonic Function MC / MCR Master control Start/Reset Operand N0~N7 Explanations: 1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows: Timer The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and the contact are both turned OFF Accumulative timer The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition Subroutine timer The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and contact are turned OFF. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-39 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Counter The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition Coils driven up by the OUT command All turned OFF Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition Application commands All of them are not acted , but the nest loop FOR-NEXT command will still be executed for times defined by users even though the MC-MCR commands is OFF. 2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command. 3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer to the following: Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 MC N0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 MC N0 Enable N0 common series connection contact LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil LD X2 Load A contact of X2 MC N1 Enable N1 common series connection contact LD X3 Load A contact of X3 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil N1 Disable N1 common series connection contact N0 Disable N0 common series connection contact X1 Y0 X2 MC N1 : X3 Y1 MCR N1 MCR N0 X10 MC N0 : MCR X11 Y10 : MCR N0 MCR : D-40 LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC N0 Enable N0 common series connection contact Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| LD X11 Load A contact of X11 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil N0 Disable N0 common series connection contact : MCR Mnemonic Function LDP Rising-edge detection operation Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- 9 Explanations: Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Operation: X1 Y1 LDP X0 Start X0 rising-edge detection AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function LDF Falling-edge detection operation Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- Explanations: Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register. Program Example: Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-41 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Operation: X1 Y1 LDF X0 Start X0 falling-edge detection AND X1 Series connection A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ANDP Rising-edge series connection Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- 9 Explanations: ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Operation: LD X1 Y1 X0 Load A contact of X0 ANDP X1 X1 rising-edge detection in series connection OUT Drive Y1 coil Y1 Mnemonic Function ANDF Falling-edge series connection Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- Explanations: ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection. Program Example: Ladder diagram: X0 Command code: Operation: LD X1 Y1 D-42 X0 Load A contact of X0 ANDF X1 X1 falling-edge detection in series connection OUT Drive Y1 coil Y1 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Mnemonic Function ORP Rising-edge parallel connection Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- 9 Explanations: The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge detection. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 Y1 X1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 ORP X1 X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function ORF Falling-edge parallel connection Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 9 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 9 9 -- Explanations: The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge detection. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 Y1 X1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 ORF X1 X1 falling-edge detection in parallel connection OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-43 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Mnemonic Function PLS Rising-edge output Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 -- 9 M0~M159 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 -- -- -- 9 Explanations: When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time. Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 PLS M0 SET Y0 M0 Timing Diagram: LD X0 Load A contact of X0 PLS M0 M0 rising-edge output LD M0 Load the contact A of M0 SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON) X0 M0 a scan time Y0 Mnemonic Function PLF Falling-edge output Operand X0~X17 Y0~Y17 -- 9 M0~M159 9 T0~15 C0~C7 D0~D29 -- -- -- Explanations: When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time. D-44 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Program Example: Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation: X0 PLF M0 SET Y0 M0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0 PLF M0 M0 falling-edge output LD M0 Load the contact A of M0 SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON) Timing Diagram: X0 a scan time M0 Y0 Mnemonic Function END Program End Operand None Explanations: It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again. D.5.9 Description of the Application Commands API Mnemonic Codes 16 bits Transmission Comparison Four Fundamental Operations of Arithmetic 32 bits P Command Steps Function 16-bit 32-bit 10 CMP -- Compare 7 -- 11 ZCP -- Zone compare 9 -- 12 MOV -- Data Move 5 -- 15 BMOV -- Block move 7 -- 20 ADD -- Perform the addition of BIN data 7 -- 21 SUB -- Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 -- Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-45 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Mnemonic Codes API 16 bits Rotation and Displacement Special command for AC motor drive 32 bits Steps P Command Function 16-bit 32-bit -- MUL -- Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 22 23 DIV -- Perform the division of BIN data 7 -- 24 INC -- Perform the addition of 1 3 -- 25 DEC -- Perform the subtraction of 1 3 -- 30 ROR -- Rotate to the right 5 -- 31 ROL -- Rotate to the left 5 -- High speed counter enable -- 13 53 -- DHSCS X 139 FPID -- Control PID parameters of inverter 5 -- 140 FREQ -- Control frequency of inverter 5 -- 141 RPR -- Read the parameter 9 -- 142 WPR -- Write the parameter 7 -- D.5.10 Explanation for the Application Commands API Mnemonic 10 CMP Type OP Operands Function S1, S2, D Compare P Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps K H C D CMP, CMPP: 7 steps S1 * * * * * * * * S2 * * * * * * * * X D Y * M KnX KnY KnM T * Operands: S1: Comparison Value 1 S2: Comparison Value 2 D: Comparison result D-46 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Explanations: 1. Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices. 2. See the specifications of each model for their range of use. 3. The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D. 4. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values. Program Example: 1. Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2. 2. When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2 will be On. When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0, Y1, and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off. 3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2. X10 CMP K10 D10 Y0 Y0 If K10>D10, Y0 = On Y1 If K10=D10, Y1 = On Y2 4. If K10<D10, Y2= On To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction. X10 X10 RST M0 RST M1 RST M2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 ZRST M0 M2 D-47 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| API Mnemonic 11 ZCP Type OP P Operands Function S1, S2, S, D Zone Compare Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps K H C D ZCP, ZCPP: 9 steps S1 * * * * * * * * S2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * X Y M S D * KnX KnY KnM T * Operands: S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone comparison S: Comparison value D: Comparison result Explanations: 1. The content in S1 should be smaller than the content in S2. 2. Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices. 3. See the specifications of each model for their range of use. 4. S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D. 5. When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower/upper bound. 6. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as negative binary values. Program Example: 1. Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2. 2. When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and M2 will be On. When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off. D-48 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| X0 ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0 M0 If C10 < K10, M0 = On M1 If K10 < = C10 < = K100, M1 = On M2 3. If C10 > K100, M2 = On To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction. X0 API X0 Mnemonic 12 MOV Type OP RST M0 RST M1 RST M2 Y S M M0 Operands Function S, D Move P Bit Devices X ZRST Word devices K H * * Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T * D M2 C D MOV, MOVP: 5 steps * * * * * * * * * * Operands: S: Source of data D: Destination of data Explanations: 1. See the specifications of each model for their range of use. 2. When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly to D. When this instruction is not executed, the content of D remains unchanged. Program Example: MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16-bit data. 1. When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the value K10 will be moved to D10 data register. 2. When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the present value T0 will be moved to D10 data register. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-49 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| X0 MOV K10 D0 MOV T0 D10 X1 API Mnemonic 15 BMOV Type OP Operands Function S, D, n Block Move P Bit Devices X Y M Word devices K H S KnX KnY KnM T * D n * Program Steps C D BMOV, BMOVP: 7 steps * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Operands: S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to be moved Explanations: 1. Range of n: 1 ~ 512 2. See the specifications of each model for their range of use. 3. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices, only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used. Program Example 1: When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 ~ D23. X10 D20 K4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D20 D21 D22 D23 n=4 Program Example 2: Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the number of digits of S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same. D-50 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| M1000 D0 D20 M0 M1 K4 M2 M3 M4 M5 n=3 M6 M7 M8 M9 Y10 Y11 M10 M11 Y12 Y13 Program Example 3: To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers. When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3 X10 1 D20 BMOV D20 D19 K3 2 D21 3 D22 D19 D20 D21 When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1 X11 3 D10 BMOV D10 D11 K3 2 D11 1 D12 D11 D12 D13 API Mnemonic 20 ADD Type OP Operands Function S1, S2, D Addition P Bit Devices X Y M Word devices K H S1 * * * * * S2 * * * * * Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T D C D * * * * * * * * * * * ADD, ADDP: 7 steps Operands: S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-51 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Explanations: 1. See the specifications of each model for their range of use. 2. This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D. 3. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic addition, e.g. 3 + (-9) = -6. 4. Flag changes in binary addition 16-bit command: A. If the operation result = 0, zero flag M1020 = On. B. If the operation result < -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On. C. If the operation result > 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On. Program Example 1: 16-bit command: When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20. X0 ADD D0 D10 D20 Remarks: Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values: Zero flag 16 bit: Zero flag -2, -1, 0 -32,768 Borrow flag -1, 0 The highest bit of the data = 1 (negative) 32 bit: Zero flag D-52 1 32,767 The highest bit of the data = 0 (positive) Zero flag -2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648 Borrow flag Zero flag -1, 0 The highest bit of the data = 1 (negative) 1 0 1 2 Carry flag Zero flag 2,147,483,647 0 1 2 The highest bit of the data = 0 (positive) Carry flag Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| API Mnemonic 21 SUB Type OP Operands Function S1, S2, D Subtraction P Bit Devices X Y Word devices M Program Steps K H C D SUB, SUBP: 7 steps S1 * * * * * * * * S2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * D KnX KnY KnM T DSUB, DSUBP: 13 steps Operands: S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder Explanations: 1. This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. 2. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic subtraction. 3. Flag changes in binary subtraction In 16-bit instruction: A. If the operation result = 0, zero flag M1020 = On. B. If the operation result < -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On. C. If the operation result > 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On. Program Example: In 16-bit BIN subtraction: When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in D20. X0 SUB Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D0 D10 D20 D-53 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| API Mnemonic 22 MUL Type OP Operands Function S1, S2, D Multiplication P Bit Devices X Y M Word devices Program Steps K H C D MUL, DMULP: 7 steps S1 * * KnX KnY KnM T * * * * * * S2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * D Operands: S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplicator D: Product Explanations: 1. In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices. 2. This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations. 16-bit command: S1 S2 b15..........b0 b15..........b0 X b15 is a symbol bit D +1 D b31..........b16b15..............b0 = b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1) b15 is a symbol bit Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value. Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value. When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result, occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data. Program Example: The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The higher 16 bits are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value. X0 D-54 MUL D0 D10 D20 MUL D0 D10 K8M0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| API Mnemonic 23 DIV Type Operands Function S1, S2, D Division P Bit Devices OP Word devices Program Steps K H C D DIV, DIVP: 7 steps S1 * * * * * * * * S2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * X Y M KnX KnY KnM T D Operands: S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder Explanations: 1. 2. In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices. This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations. 16-bit instruction: Remainder Quotient +1 / = Program Example: When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value. X0 API Mnemonic 24 INC Type OP D M D10 D20 DIV D0 D10 K4Y0 Function D Increment P Y D0 Operands Bit Devices X DIV Word devices K H Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T * Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 * * C D INC, INCP: 3 steps * * D-55 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Operands: D: Destination device Explanations: 1. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will plus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed. 2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP). 3. In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit operation, 2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648. Program Example: When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically. X0 API Mnemonic 25 DEC Type OP Y M D0 Operands Function D Decrement P Bit Devices X INCP Word devices K H Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T D * * * C D DEC, DECP: 3 steps * * Operands: D: Destination Explanations: 1. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will minus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed. 2. 3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP). In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation, 2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647. Program Example: When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically. X0 D-56 DECP D0 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| API Mnemonic 30 ROR Type Operands Function D, n Rotate to the Right P Bit Devices OP X Y Word devices M K H KnX KnY KnM T D * * n Program Steps * * C D ROR, RORP: 5 steps * * * Operands: D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations: 1. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits. 2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP). Program Example: When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022. X0 RORP D10 K4 Rotate to the right upper bit lower bit Carry flag D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 upper bit 16 bits After one rotation to the right lower bit D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 * API Mnemonic 31 ROL Type OP Operands Function D, n Rotate to the Left P Bit Devices X Y M Word devices K H D n Carry flag KnX KnY KnM T * * Program Steps * * C D ROL, ROLP: 5 steps * * * Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-57 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Operands: D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation Explanations: 1. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits. 2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP). Program Example: When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022. X0 D10 K4 Rotate to the left upper bit lower bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Carry flag upper bit 1 D10 16 bits After one rotation to the left lower bit 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Carry flag D10 D.5.11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive API Mnemonic Operands Function 53 DHSCS S1, S2, D Compare (for high-speed counter) Type OP Bit Devices X Y M S1 Word devices K H * * Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T C D DHSCS: 13 steps * * S2 * D * * * * Operands: S1: Comparison Value S2: High-speed counter C235 D: Comparison result Explanations: 1. It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse. 2. To count automatically, please set the target value by using DHSCS command and set M1028=On. The counter C235 will be ON when the count number = target value. If you want to clear C235, please set M1029=ON. D-58 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| 3. Please use rising-edge/falling-edge command, such as LDP/LDF, for the contact condition. Please notice that error may occur when using contact A/B for the contact condition. 4. There are three input modes for high-speed counter in the following can be set by D1044. A-B phase mode(4 times frequency )(D1044=0): user can input the A and B pulse for counting. Make sure that A, B and GND are grounding. Pulse + signal mode(D1044=1): user can count by pulse input or signal. A is for pulse and B is for signal. Make sure that A, B and GND are grounding. Pulse + flag mode(D1044=2): user can count by M1030. Only A is needed for this mode and make sure that A , and GND are grounding. Program Example: 1. Assume that when M100=ON, it is set to A-B phase mode. When M101=ON, it is set to pulse+signal mode. When M102=ON, it is set to pulse+flag mode. 2. M1030 is used to set to count up (OFF) and count down (ON). 3. If M0 goes from OFF to ON, DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of highspeed counter. When C235 goes from H’2 to H’3 or from H’4 to H’3, M3 will be always be ON. 4. If M1 goes from OFF to ON, DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of highspeed counter. When C235 goes from H’1004F to H’10050 or from H’10051 to H’10050, M2 will be always be ON. 5. M1028: it is used to enable(ON)/disable(OFF) the high-speed counter function. M1029: it is used to clear the high-speed counter. M1018: it is used to start high-speed counter function. (when M1028 is ON). 6. D1025: the low word of high-speed counter C235. D1026: the high word of high-speed counter C235. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-59 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| M100 MOV K0 D1044 MOV K1 D1044 MOV K2 D1044 M101 M102 M102 M1030 M0 M1018 M1 M1018 DHSCS H10050 C235 M2 DHSCS H3 C235 M3 MOV D1025 D0 MOV D1026 D1 M2 Y1 M3 M10 M1028 M11 M1029 M1000 END API 139 Type OP Mnemonic RPR S2 D-60 Function S1, S2 Read the AC motor drive’s parameters Bit Devices X S1 Operands P Y M Word devices K H * * Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T C D RPR, RPRP: 5 steps * * Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Operands: S1: Data address for reading S2: Register that saves the read data API Mnemonic 140 WPR Type OP Operands Function S1, S2 Write the AC motor drive’s parameters P Bit Devices X Y M Word devices KnX KnY KnM T Program Steps D WPR, WPRP: 5 steps K H C S1 * * * S2 * * * Operands: S1: Data address for writing S2: Register that saves the written data Program Example: 1. Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the VFD-E into D0 and H2101 into D1. 2. 3. When M0=ON, it will write the data in D10 to the address H2001 of the VFD-E. When M1=ON, it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the VFD-E, i.e. start the AC motor drive. 4. When M2=ON, it will write the data in H1 to the address H2000 of the VFD-E, i.e. stop the AC motor drive. 5. When data is written successfully, M1017 will be ON. M1000 RPR H2100 D0 RPR H2101 D1 WPR D10 H2001 WPRP H2 H2000 WPRP H1 H2000 M0 M1 M2 M1017 Y0 END Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-61 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| API Mnemonic 141 FPID Type P Operands Function S1, S2, S3, S4 PID control for the AC motor drive Bit Devices OP X Y M Word devices Program Steps KnX KnY KnM T C D FPID, FPIDP: 9 steps K H S1 * * * S2 * * * S3 * * * S4 * * * Operands: S1: PID Set Point Selection(0-4), S2: Proportional gain P (0-100), S3: Integral Time I (0-10000), S4: Derivative control D (0-100) Explanation: 1. This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly, including Pr.10.00 PID set point selection, Pr.10.02 Proportional gain (P), Pr.10.03 Integral time (I) and Pr.10.04 Derivative control (D) Program Example: 1. Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0, S3=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds). 2. Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1 (unit: 0.01), S3=0 and S4=0. 3. Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital keypad), S2=1 (unit: 0.01), S3=0 and S4=0. 4. D-62 D1027: frequency command controlled by PID. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| M0 FPID H0 H0 H1 H1 FPID H0 H1 H0 H0 FPID H1 H1 H0 H0 MOV D1027 D1 M1 M2 M1000 END API Mnemonic 142 FREQ Type P Operands Function S1, S2, S3 Operation control of the AC motor drive Bit Devices OP X Y M Word devices KnX KnY KnM T Program Steps K H C D FREQ, FREQP: 7 steps S1 * * * S2 * * * S3 * * * Operands: S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, S3: deceleration time Explanation: 1. This command can control frequency command, acceleration time and deceleration time of the AC motor drive. Please use M1025 to RUN(ON)/STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive and use M1025 to control the operation direction: FWD(ON)/REV(OFF). Program Example: 1. M1025: RUN(ON)/STOP(Off) the AC motor drive. M1026: operation direction of the AC motor drive – FWD(OFF)/REV(ON). M1015: frequency is reached. 2. When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0. 3. When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K3000(30.00Hz), acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 D-63 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| M1000 M1025 M11 M1026 M10 M11 M11 FREQP K300 K0 K0 FREQ K3000 K50 K60 M10 END D-64 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| D.6 Error Code Code ID Description Corrective Actions Check if the program is error and download the program again PLod 20 Data write error PLSv 21 Power on again and download the Data write error when executing program again PLdA 22 Program upload error PLFn 23 Check if the program is error and Command error when download download program again program PLor 30 Program capacity exceeds memory capacity PLFF 31 Command error when executing PLSn 32 Check sum error PLEd 33 There is no “END” command in the program PLCr 34 The command MC is continuous used more than nine times Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 1. 2. Please upload again. Return to the factory if it occurs continuously Power on again and download program again D-65 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| This page intentionally left blank D-66 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix E CANopen Function The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data (Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message). And it also has network management data, including Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for details. Delta CANopen supports functions: Support CAN2.0A Protocol; Support CANopen DS301 V4.02; Support DSP-402 V2.0. Delta CANopen supports services: PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO2 SDO (Service Data Object): Initiate SDO Download; Initiate SDO Upload; Abort SDO; SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node. SOP (Special Object Protocol): Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02; Support SYNC service; Support Emergency service. NMT (Network Management): Support NMT module control; Support NMT Error control; Support Boot-up. Delta CANopen doesn’t support service: Time Stamp service Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 E-1 Appendix E CANopen Function | E.1 Overview E.1.1 CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2). Device Profile CiA DSP-401 OSI Layer 7 Application OSI Layer 2 Data Link Layer OSI Layer 1 Physical Layer Device Profile CiA DSP-404 Device Profile CiA DSP-XXX Communication Profile CiA DS-301 CAN Controller CAN 2.0A + + - ISO 11898 CAN bus E-2 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| E.1.2 RJ-45 Pin Definition 8~1 8~1 socket plug PIN Signal 1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high) Description 2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low) 3 CAN_GND 4 SG+ 485 communication 5 SG- 485 communication 7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V- Ground / 0V /V- E.1.3 Pre-Defined Connection Set To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows: COB Identifier (CAN Identifier) 10 9 8 7 6 5 Function Code Object 4 3 2 1 0 Node Number Function Code Node Number COB-ID Object Dictionary Index Broadcast messages NMT 0000 - 0 - SYNC 0001 - 0x80 0x1005, 0x1006, 0x1007 TIME STAMP 0010 - 0x100 0x1012, 0x1013 0001 1-127 Point-to-point messages Emergency Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 0x81-0xFF 0x1014, 0x1015 E-3 Appendix E CANopen Function | Object Function Code Node Number COB-ID Object Dictionary Index TPDO1 0011 1-127 0x181-0x1FF 0x1800 RPDO1 0100 1-127 0x201-0x27F 0x1400 TPDO2 0101 1-127 0x281-0x2FF 0x1801 RPDO2 0110 1-127 0x301-0x37F 0x1401 TPDO3 0111 1-127 0x381-0x3FF 0x1802 RPDO3 1000 1-127 0x401-0x47F 0x1402 TPDO4 1001 1-127 0x481-0x4FF 0x1803 RPDO4 1010 1-127 0x501-0x57F 0x1403 Default SDO (tx) 1011 1-127 0x581-0x5FF 0x1200 Default SDO (rx) 1100 1-127 0x601-0x67F 0x1200 NMT Error Control 1110 1-127 0x701-0x77F 0x1016, 0x1017 E.1.4 CANopen Communication Protocol It has services as follows: NMT (Network Management Object) SDO (Service Data Object) PDO (Process Data Object) EMCY (Emergency Object) E.1.4.1 NMT (Network Management Object) The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. Only one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All CANopen nodes have a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The state diagram of a node are shown as follows: E-4 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| (1) Initializing (15) Reset Application (11) (10) (9) (16) Reset Communication (14) (2)F Pre-Operation ABCD (3) (4) (13) (12) (5) (7) Stopped AB (6) (8) Operation ABCD (1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state A: NMT (2) Enter pre-operational state automatically B: Node Guard (3) (6) Start remote node C: SDO (4) (7) Enter pre-operational state D: Emergency (5) (8) Stop remote node E: PDO (9) (10) (11) Reset node F: Boot-up (12) (13) (14) Reset communication (15) Enter reset application state automatically (16) Enter reset communication state automatically Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 E-5 Appendix E CANopen Function | Initializing PDO SDO SYNC Time Stamp EMERG Boot-up NMT Pre-Operational Operational ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Stopped ○ ○ NMT Protocol is shown as follows: NMT Master Request request Cs Value 1 2 128 129 130 Start Remote Node byte 0 byte 1 CS Node-ID COB-ID=0 NMT Slave(s) Indication(s) Indication Indication Indication Definition Start Stop Enter Pre-Operational Reset Node Reset Communication E.1.4.2 SDO (Service Data Object) SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model. One SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between two nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment. The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD in the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The access path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index in OD, and has sub-index if necessary. The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows: E-6 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Data 0 Type 7 6 5 command 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Initiate Domain Client Download Server Initiate Domain Client Upload Server Abort Domain Client Transfer Server N: Bytes not use E: normal(0)/expedited(1) S: size indicated 4 3 2 - N - N - - Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 0 Index Index Index Data Data Data Data L H Sub LL LH HL HH ES - - ES - - - E.1.4.3 PDO (Process Data Object) PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one device to one another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a nonconfirmed mode. PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the following table: Type Number PDO Cyclic 0 1-240 Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous ○ ○ 241-251 252 RTR only ○ ○ Reserved ○ ○ 253 ○ 254 ○ 255 ○ ○ Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions. Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC. Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR. Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format. Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 E-7 Appendix E CANopen Function | Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission. All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary. Example: Master transmits PDO data to Slave PDO1 CAN(H) CAN(L) Slave Master PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88, PDO1 Map 0x60400010 Index Sub 0x1600 0 1 0x1600 0x1600 0x1600 0x1600 4 0. Number 1. Mapped Object 2. Mapped Object 3. Mapped Object 4. Mapped Object 0 0. Control word 2 3 0x6040 Definition Value R/W Size 1 0x60400010 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W U8 U32 U32 U32 U32 0x2211 R/W U16 (2 Bytes) Slave returns message to Master PDO1 CAN(H) CAN(L) Slave Master PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7, 0xF3, 0x00, PDO1 Map Index Sub 0x1A00 0 1 2 3 0x1A00 0x1A00 0x1A00 0x1A00 0x6041 E-8 Definition 4 0. Number 1. Mapped Object 2. Mapped Object 3. Mapped Object 4. Mapped Object 0 Status Word Value R/W Size 1 0x60410010 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W U8 U32 U32 U32 U32 0xF3 R/W U16 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| E.1.4.4 EMCY (Emergency Object) Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt. The data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following: Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Content Emergency Error Error register Manufacturer specific Error Field Code (Object 1001H) Definition of Emergency Object Display Controller Error Code 0001H 0002H 0003H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0011H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001FH Description Over current Over voltage Overheating Overload Overload 1 Overload 2 External Fault Over-current during acceleration Over-current during deceleration Over-current during constant speed operation Ground fault Lower than standard voltage Phase Loss External Base Block Software protection failure Internal EEPROM can not be programmed Internal EEPROM can not be read CC (current clamp) OV hardware error GFF hardware error OC hardware error U-phase error V-phase error W-phase error OV or LV Temperature sensor error Internal EEPROM can not be programmed Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 CANopen CANopen Error Error Register Code (bit 0~7) 7400H 1 7400H 2 4310H 3 2310H 1 7120H 1 2310H 1 9000H 7 2310H 1 2310H 1 2310H 1 2240H 1 3220h 3130h 9000h 6320h 2 7 7 7 5530h 7 5530h 5000h 5000h 5000h 5000h 2300h 2300h 2300h 3210h 4310h 7 7 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 5530h 7 E-9 Appendix E CANopen Function | Display Controller Error Code 0020H 0021H 0023H 0024H 0029H Description Internal EEPROM can not be read Analog signal error Motor overheat protection PG signal error Communication time-out error on the control board or power board CANopen CANopen Error Error Register Code (bit 0~7) 5530h 7 FF00h 7 7120h 3 7300h 7 7500h 4 Definition of Index Index Sub Definition 0x1000 0 0x1001 0 0x1005 0 0x1006 0 0x1008 0 0x1009 0 0x100A 0 0x100C 0x100D 0 0 Abort connection option code Error register COB-ID SYNC message Communication cycle period Manufacturer device name Manufacturer hardware version Manufacturer software version Guarding time Guarding factor 0x1014 0 COB-ID emergency 0x1015 0 Inhibit time EMCY 0 Number 1 Consumer heartbeat time 0 Producer heartbeat time 0 1 Number Vender ID 0x1016 0x1017 0x1018 0x1200 2 Product code 3 Revision Server SDO Parameter COB-ID Client -> Server 0 1 E-10 Factory Setting R/W Size Unit NOTE RO U32 0x00010192 0 RO U8 0x80 0 0 0 RW U32 RW U32 us 500us~15000us RO U32 RO U32 RO U32 0 0 RW U16 0 RW U8 0x0000080 RO U32 +Node-ID ms 0x80 + node 1 It is set to be RW U16 100us multiple of 10. 0 0x1 RO U8 Heartbeat time can be used when 0x0 RW U32 1ms Guarding time is invalid. Heartbeat time can be used when 0x0 RW U16 1ms Guarding time is invalid. 0x3 RO U8 0x000001DD RO U32 0x00002600 RO U32 +model 0x00010000 RO U32 RO U8 2 0x0000600+ RO U32 Node-ID Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Index Sub Definition 0 COB-ID Client <Server Number 1 COB-ID used by PDO 2 Factory Setting 0x0000580+ Node-ID 2 0x00000200 +Node-ID R/W Size Unit RO U32 RO U8 RW U32 0x1400 2 Transmission Type 0 Number 1 COB-ID used by PDO 5 RW U8 0x1600 0x1601 0x1800 0x1801 Transmission Type 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 Number 1.Mapped Object 2.Mapped Object 3.Mapped Object 4.Mapped Object Number 1.Mapped Object 2.Mapped Object 3.Mapped Object 4.Mapped Object Number 1 COB-ID used by PDO 2 Transmission Type 3 Inhibit time 4 5 0 Reserved Event timer Number 1 COB-ID used by PDO 2 Transmission Type Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 00:Acyclic & Synchronous 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous 255: Asynchronous 2 RO U8 0x80000300 RW U32 +Node-ID 0x1401 2 NOTE 5 RW 2 0x60400010 0x60420020 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0x00000180 +Node-ID RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RO U8 U32 U32 U32 U32 U8 U32 U32 U32 U32 U8 RW U32 5 RW 0 3 0 5 0x80000280 +Node-ID U8 00:Acyclic & Synchronous 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous 255: Asynchronous RW RW RW RO 00:Acyclic & Synchrouous 01~240:Cyclic & U8 Synchrouous 253: Remote function 255: Asynchronous It is set to be U16 100us multiple of 10. U8 Reserved U16 1ms U8 RW U32 5 RW U8 00:Acyclic & Synchrouous 01~240:Cyclic & Synchrouous 253: Remote function 255: Asynchronous E-11 Appendix E CANopen Function | Index 0x1A00 0x1A01 Index E-12 Sub Factory Setting Definition 3 Inhibit time 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 Reserved Event timer Number 1.Mapped Object 2.Mapped Object 3.Mapped Object 4.Mapped Object Number 1.Mapped Object 2.Mapped Object 3.Mapped Object 4.Mapped Object Sub Definition 0 3 0 2 0x60410010 0x60430010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W Size Unit RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW NOTE It is set to be U16 100us multiple of 10. U8 U16 1ms U8 U32 U32 U32 U32 U8 U32 U32 U32 U32 Factory RW Size Unit Map Setting NOTE 0: No action Yes 2: Disable Voltage 3: Quick stop Yes bit 0 ~ 3: switch status bit 4: rfg enable Yes bit 5: rfg unlock bit 6: rfg use ref bit 7: Fault reset Bit0 Ready to switch on Bit1 Switched on Bit2 Operation enabled Bit3 Fault Bit4 Voltage enabled Bit5 Quick stop Bit6 Switch on disabled Yes Bit7 Warning Bit8 Bit9 Remote Bit10 Target reached Bit11 Internal limit active Bit12 - 13 Bit14 - 15 rpm Yes 0x6007 0 Abort connection option code 2 RW S16 0x603F 0 Error code 0 RO U16 0x6040 0 Control word 0 RW U16 0x6041 0 Status word 0 RO U16 0x6042 0 RW S16 0 vl target velocity vl velocity demand 0 0x6043 0 RO S16 rpm Yes 0x604F 0 0x6050 0 0x6051 0 If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and can’t be set to 0. If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and can’t be set to 0. If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and can’t be set to 0. vl ramp function time Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 Appendix D How to Use PLC Function| Index Sub 0x605A 0 0x6060 0 0x6061 0 Definition Factory RW Size Unit Map Setting Quick stop option code Mode of operation Mode of operation display NOTE 2 0 : disable drive function 1 :slow down on slow down ramp 2: slow down on quick stop ramp (2th decel. time) RW S16 1ms Yes 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 2 RO U8 Yes Speed mode 2 RO U8 Yes E.2 How to Control by CANopen To control the AC motor drive by CANopen, please set parameters by the following steps: Step 1. Operation source setting: set Pr.02.01 to 5 (CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.) Step 2. Frequency source setting: set Pr.02.00 to 5 (CANopen communication) Step 3. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09.13 (CANopen Communication Address 1-127) Step 4. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.14 (CANBUS Baud Rate) Step 5. Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary: Set Pr.04.05 to 04.08 or Pr.11.06 to 11.11 to 23. According to DSP-402 motion control rule, CANopen provides speed control mode. There are many status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop. To get current status, please read “Status Word”. Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external terminals. Control word is a 16-byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition. The status bits are bit 4 to bit 6 as shown in the following: Bit 4: ramp function enabled Bit 5: ramp function disabled Bit 6: rfg use reference Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11 E-13 Appendix E CANopen Function | Following is the flow chart for status switch: Power Disable Fault Start Fault Reaction Active X0XX1111 Not Ready to Switch On Fault X0XX0000 X0XX1000 XXXXXXXX Switch On Disable 0XXXXX0X X1XX0000 0XXXX110 QStop=1 0XXXXX0X or 0XXXX01X QStop=0 Ready to Switch On X01X0001 0XXXX111 0XXXX01X or 0XXXXX0X QStop=0 0XXXX110 Power Enable Switch On X01X0011 0XXX1111 0XXX1111 Operation Enable X01X0111 E-14 0XXX0110 0XXXX01X QStop=0 0XXX1111 QStop=1 0XXXXX0X or Font=0 Quick Stop Active X00X0111 Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11